of dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner's. Manual immediately. It explains all of the features,.
INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and safety information. A separate Warranty Information Booklet is included in your Owner’s literature portfolio. Always carry it with you when you take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer. The Warranty Information Booklet contents provide com-plete information about all warranties cov
It explains all of the features, controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and safety information.
FOREWORD
Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engineering and superior craftsmanship with a simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with traditional Japanese culture.
The result is a different notion of luxury and beauty. The car itself is important, but also is the sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes in its driver, and the sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI -- from the way it looks and drives to the high level of dealer service.
To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner's Manual immediately. It explains all of the features, controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and safety information.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet is included in your Owner's literature portfolio. Always carry it with you when you take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer. The Warranty Information Booklet contents provide complete information about all warranties covering this vehicle, the requirements to keep the warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.
Additionally, a separate Customer Care and Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state's lemon law.
INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfying ownership experience for as long as you own your car. Should you have any questions regarding your INFINITI or your INFINITI dealer, please contact our Consumer Affairs department at 1-800-662-6200. In Hawaii 1-808-836-0888 (Oahu number). In Canada 1-800-361-4792. Thank you.
READ FIRST -- THEN DRIVE SAFEL Y
Before driving your vehicle please read your Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!
NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat.
ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle
safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification will not be covered under the INFINITI warranties.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.
SII0151
If you see this symbol, it means "Do not do this" or "Do not let this happen".
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.
© 2003 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................... 0-1 SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS ................... 1-1 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS .......................................................... 2-1 PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS............................................ 3-1 MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS ...... 4-1 STARTING AND DRIVING................................................................... 5-1 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................. 6-1 APPEARANCE AND CARE................................................................... 7-1 MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT-YOURSELF .................................................. 8-1 TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION........................................... 9-1 INDEX ........................................................................................ 10-1
0 Illustrated table of contents
Exterior front................................................ 0-2 Exterior rear................................................. 0-3 Instrument panel.......................................... 0-4 Meters and gauges ...................................... 0-5 Engine compartment check locations.......... 0-6
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXTERIOR FRONT
0-2
1. Hood (Page 3-11) 2. Headlight and turn signal switch (P .2-21)/
Bulb replacement (P .8-27) 3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P .2-20)/Wiper replacement (P .8-20) 4. Interior light (P .2-41) 5. Sunroof (if so equipped) 6. Power windows (P .2-35) 7. Tires
-- Wheel and tires (P .8-33, P .9-9) -- Flat tire (P .6-2) 8. Mirrors (P .3-20) 9. Doors -- Keys (P .3-2) -- Door locks (P .3-3) -- Electronic key (P .3-6)
SIX0004
EXTERIOR REAR
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. High-mounted stop light (P .8-29) 2. Side marker, Stop/Tail, Turn signal light
(Bulb replacement) (P .8-29) 3. Rear window defroster switch (P .2-20) 4. Fuel filler lid (P .3-17)/Fuel recommenda-
tion (P .9-3) 5. Trunk lid (P .3-12) 6. Child safety locks (P .3-5)
SIX0005
0-3
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-4
SII0392
1. Outside mirror remote control (P .3-21)
2. Headlight/turn signal switch (P .2-21) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio control (P .4-33) 4. Meters and gauges (P .2-3) 5. Driver supplemental air bag (P .1-7) 6. Cruise control main/set switch (P .5-17)
Intelligent cruise control switch (P .5-25) 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P .2-20) 8. Ignition switch (P .5-7) 9. Security indicator light (P .2-17) 10. Center ventilator (P .4-12) 11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P .2-26) 12. Display, Climate and Audio control
switches/buttons (P .4-3)/Navigation system* 13. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P .1-7) 14. Instrument brightness control (P .2-25) 15. Headlight aiming control switch (P .2-24) 16. Vehicle dynamic control OFF switch (P .2-30) 17. Hood release handle (P .3-11) 18. Active damper suspension mode selector
(P .2-29) 19. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch
(P .3-19) 20. Fuse box cover (P .8-24) 21. Parking brake pedal/parking brake release
pedal (P .5-16) 22. CD changer (P .4-31) 23. Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P .2-31) 24. Automatic transmission selector lever (P .5-10) 25. Front heated seat switch (P .2-27) 26. Clock (P .2-30)
27. Cassette deck (P .4-22) 28. Glove box (P .2-33)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual.
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS
METERS AND GAUGES
1. Speedometer (P .2-4) 2. Odometer/twin trip odometer (P .2-4) 3. Tachometer (P .2-4) 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P .2-5) 5. Fuel gauge (P .2-5)
SII0384
6. Warming/indicator lights (P .2-9) 7. Intelligent cruise control system display
(P .2-14)
0-5
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
1: Fuse/fusible link holder (P .8-24) 2: Engine oil filler cap (P .8-11) 3: Brake fluid reservoir (P .8-15) 4: Coolant reservoir (P .8-9) 5: Battery (P .8-16) 6: Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P .8-16) 7: Power steering fluid reservoir (P .8-14) 8: Radiator filler cap (P .8-10) 9: Cooling fan fluid reservoir (P .8-15) 10: Engine oil dipstick (P .8-11) 11: Air cleaner (P .8-20)
SID0261
0-6
1 SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Seats............................................................ 1-2 Front power seat adjustment ................. 1-2 Rear power seat adjustment (if so equipped)................................................ 1-4 Head restraint adjustment ...................... 1-5 Active head restraint (Front seats)......... 1-6
Supplemental restraint system.................... 1-7 Precautions on supplemental restraint system .................................................... 1-7 Supplemental air bag warning labels... 1-20 Supplemental air bag warning light..... 1-21
Seat belts .................................................. 1-22 Precautions on seat belt usage ........... 1-22 Child safety........................................... 1-25
Pregnant women .................................. 1-27 Injured persons .................................... 1-27 Three-point type seat belt.................... 1-27 Seat belt extenders .............................. 1-31 Seat belt maintenance ......................... 1-31 Child restraints .......................................... 1-31 Precautions on child restraints ............ 1-31 Installation on rear seat center or outboard positions............................................... 1-34 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system.................................. 1-39 Top tether strap child restraint ............ 1-40 Installation on front passenger seat.... 1-42
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SEATS
ries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See "Precautions on seat belt usage" later in this section.
WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The
1-2
SIR0091
shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious inju-
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
Forward and backward
Reclining
Operating tips
The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.
Do not operate the power seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
SIR0153
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See "Precautions on seat belt usage" later in this section.) The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
SIR0154
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.
1-3
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Seat lifter (Driver's seat)
Lumbar support (Driver's seat)
REAR POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Forward and backward
Press the switch to move the seat forward or back. The seats move continuously while the switch is being pressed.
SIR0155
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.
SIP0275
The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the switch forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.
SIR0161
1-4
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Automatic return
SIR0152
When the ON portion of the automatic return switch on the rear armrest is pressed, the automatic return function is activated. When a rear door is opened, the rear seat on that side automatically slides all the way back, facilitating entry and exit. Pressing the CANCEL side of the switch will deactivate the automatic return function.
Automatic reverse operation
When the driver's seat is moved backward by the automatic drive positioner system, the rear left side seat will automatically move backward even if the rear seat automatic return switch is in the CANCEL position.
This operation maintains rear passenger foot and knee space.
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat.
SIR0099
To raise the head restraint, simply pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down.
1-5
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
To adjust the head restraint forward and backward, push it in the direction required.
SIR0144
Adjust the head restraints so the center is level with the center of your ears.
ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (Front seats)
SIR0113
WARNING
Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.
Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident.
Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function.
The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant's head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.
1-6
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions.
Properly adjust the active head restraints as described in the previous section.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger front impact supplemental air bags, front seat side-impact supplemental air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and front seat pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the face and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Supplemental side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The front seat side-impact supplemental air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Supplemental side-impact curtain air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See "Seat belts" later in this section
for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.
1-7
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
WARNING
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll over, or lower severity
1-8
SIR0092
frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The seat belts and the supple-
mental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.
The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.
SIR0093
1-9
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0006
1-10
SIR0007
SIR0008
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0009
SIR0010
SIR0011
1-11
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
WARNING
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.
Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible.
Also, never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See "Child restraints" later in this section for details.
SIR0059
SIR0150
1-12
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0094
WARNING
Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag: The supplemental side air bag
SIR0121 SIR0122
and curtain side-impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or
1-13
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.
1-14
Supplemental front air bag system
The driver supplemental air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional
SIR0145A
certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows front air bags to be designed to inflate somewhat less forcefully than previously. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The front air bags are designed to
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation.
The supplemental air bag system has dual stage inflators for both the driver and passenger air bags. The system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened, inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and whether the seat belts are being used. Only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. This does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about the performance of your air bag system, please
contact your INFINITI dealer.
When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front
occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the air bag module during inflation. The air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates.
1-15
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Right after inflation, several air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental front air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the air bag or damage to the air bag system.
Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For ex-
ample, do not change the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel, or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
Work around and on the supple mental front air bag system should be done by an INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI dealer. The yellow Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect inflation of the supplemental air bag system.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
1-16
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system
SIR0146
The supplemental side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be
followed. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation.
When the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact
force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
1-17
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.
WARNING
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the side air bag inflates.
Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of this side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag system.
Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seat by placing
material near the seatback or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
Work around and on the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system should be done by an INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or over the complete har-
1-18
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
ness for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For front seats)
WARNING
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor as a unit.
If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system
checked and, if necessary, replaced by your INFINITI dealer.
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pretensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pretensioner seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by an INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre-
tensioner seat belt system.
If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI dealer. Correct pretensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental front air bag. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt's retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts.
1-19
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner
system, the supplemental air bag warning
light
will not come on, will flash inter-
mittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and
remain on after the ignition key has been
turned to the ON or START position. In this
case, the pre-tensioner seat belt may not
function properly. They must be checked and
repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
INFINITI dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side-impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
1-20
SIR0096D
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
SIR0132
The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-
playing
in the instrument panel, moni-
tors the circuits of the supplemental front air
bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag systems, and pre-
tensioner seat belt. The circuits monitored by
the air bag warning light are the diagnosis
sensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag
modules, side air bag modules, curtain side-
impact air bag modules, and all related wiring,
and pre-tensioner seat belt.
After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing:
The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and/or pre-
tensioner seat belt may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain sideimpact air bag systems and/or pretensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident.
Repair and replacement procedure
The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after
1-21
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by an INFINITI dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, related parts and pre-tensioner seat belt should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
Once the supplemental front air bag, side air bag or curtain sideimpact air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the supplemental front air bags inflate, the
pre-tensioner seat belt must also be replaced. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system should be replaced by an INFINITI dealer. The air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired.
The supplemental front air bag, side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag systems and pretensioner seat belt system should be inspected by an INFINITI dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.
If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI dealer .
Correct disposal procedures are
set forth in the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most states, all provinces and territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
1-22
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should
SIR0125
be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effective-
ness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.
Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder .
Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.
1-23
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
Do not wear the belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its
SIR0102
effectiveness. Do not allow more than one per-
son to use the same belt. Never carry more people in the
vehicle than there are seat belts.
SIR0016
If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunc-
1-24
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0014
tion in the system. Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer . Once the pre-tensioner has activated, it cannot be reused
and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your INFINITI dealer.
Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system components should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by your INFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.
CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who out-
1-25
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
grow rear facing child restraints.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident. An improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
All US states and provinces of Canada require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See "Child restraints" later in this section.)
In addition, there are many types of child restraints available for larger children which
1-26
should be used for maximum protection.
INFINITI recommends that all preteens and children be restrained in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. See "Supplemental restraint system" earlier in this section for precautions.
Infants and small children
INFINITI recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint which fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided.
If the child's seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.
PREGNANT WOMEN
INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist, and place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
INFINITI recommends that injured persons
use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See "Seats" earlier in this section.
SIR0126
1-27
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.
SIR0019
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps.
The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion will permit the belt to move,
1-28
SIR0127
SIR0061
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Make sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger and rear seat belts have a
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode. When the cinching mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see "Child restraints" later in this section.
The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
Unfastening the seat belts
SIR0021
To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.
Checking seat belt operation
Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement by two separate methods:
when the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor .
when the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the belts, check their operation as follows:
grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any question about belt operation, see your INFINITI dealer.
1-29
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Center of rear seat
Selecting correct set of seat belts:
Shoulder belt height adjustment (For front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. See earlier in "Seat belts" for precautions on seat belt usage.
injury in an accident.
SIR0159
The center seat belt buckle is identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.
WARNING
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of
SIR0162
To adjust, push the button, and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
1-30
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See your INFINITI dealer for assistance if the extender is required.
WARNING
Only INFINITI belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment belts, should be used with the INFINITI belts.
Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unneces-
sary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any non-caustic solution recommended for gently cleaning cloth upholstery or carpets. Then brush it, wipe with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may
retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing are found, the entire belt assembly should be replaced.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious in-
1-31
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
jury or death.
Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.
Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
INFINITI recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when
1-32
properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious in jury or death in an accident.
In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a three-point type seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see "LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) SYSTEM" later in this section.
Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint system,
keep the following points in mind:
choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.
if the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All US states and provinces of Canada require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
WARNING
Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle.
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.
If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision
or a sudden stop greatly increases.
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible.
After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
For a front facing child restraint, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not go in front of the
child's face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat. See "Installation on front passenger seat" later in this section for details.
When your child restraint is not in use, store it in the trunk or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and
1-33
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.
INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT CENTER OR OUTBOARD POSITIONS Front facing
WARNING
The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause
injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps:
SIR0117
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's instructions.
SIR0118
1-34
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0043A
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
SIR0039B
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.
SIR0062
4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.
1-35
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0042A
5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm).
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.
Rear facing
WARNING
The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be
used when installing a child restraint. Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.
When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps:
SIR0119
1-36
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's instructions.
SIR0120
SIR0046
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
SIR0045A
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.
1-37
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0047
4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.
SIR0048A
5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm).
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.
1-38
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
SIR0160
WARNING
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed
in an accident.
Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the child restraint lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.
The LATCH system anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system,
you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH system. This information may also be in the child restraint owner's manual. If you have such a child restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint.
The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors.
Some child restraints may also require the use of a top tether strap. See "Top tether strap child restraint" later in this section for installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
1-39
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.
When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, follow these steps.
WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH system anchors are obstructed.
1. To install the LATCH system compatible child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into
the anchor points on the rear seat. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether, see "Top tether strap child restraint" later in this section for installation instructions.
2. After attaching the child restraint and before placing the child in it, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use.
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
SIR0148
WARNING
The child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
1-40
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
After removing a rear seat head restraint for top tether installation, store it securely to prevent it from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. Always replace it and adjust properly when top tether is no longer in use.
If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the anchor point provided behind its position.
First, adjust the seatback so that it is upright. Then secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions), as applicable.
Remove the head restraint from the seatback. Store it in a secure place. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback and
secure it to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest installation. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instruction to remove any slack.
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint installation instructions in this section and the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Anchor point locations
Anchor points are located under the rear parcel shelf finisher. If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your INFINITI dealer for details.
1-41
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
WARNING
Never install a rear facing child
SSS0300
restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate with great force. A rear fac-
ing child restraint could be struck by the air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.
INFINITI recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rear most position.
A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.
The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.
1-42
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
Failure to use the retractor's locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.
facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps:
SSS0301
1. Position the child restraint on the front passenger seat. It should be placed in a front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rear most position. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear
SIR0055
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
1-43
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
SIR0053A
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.
SIR0056
4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt.
SSS0302
5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm).
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
1-44
SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.
1-45
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instrument panel ......................................... 2-2 Meters and gauges ...................................... 2-3
Speedometer and odometer................... 2-4 Tachometer............................................. 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-5 Fuel gauge .............................................. 2-5 Compass...................................................... 2-6 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders..................................................... 2-9 Checking bulbs....................................... 2-9 Warning lights ........................................ 2-9 Indicator lights ..................................... 2-14 Audible reminders ................................ 2-16 Security systems ....................................... 2-17 Vehicle security system........................ 2-17 Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ..... 2-18 Windshield wiper and washer switch........ 2-20 Switch operation .................................. 2-20
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch........................ 2-20 Headlight and turn signal switch............... 2-21
Xenon headlights.................................. 2-21 Headlight switch................................... 2-22 Turn signal switch................................ 2-25 Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-26 Horn........................................................... 2-26 Heated seats (if so equipped)................... 2-27 Climate controlled seat (if so equipped)... 2-28 Active damper suspension mode select switch (if so equipped) ......................................... 2-29 Auto mode............................................ 2-29 Sport mode .......................................... 2-29 Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch ........ 2-30 Clock .......................................................... 2-30 Adjusting the time ................................ 2-30 Power outlet .............................................. 2-30 Cigarette lighters and ashtrays.................. 2-31
Storage ...................................................... 2-32 Cup holders .......................................... 2-32 Glove box ............................................. 2-33 Console box.......................................... 2-34 Cargo net.............................................. 2-35
Windows .................................................... 2-35 Power windows .................................... 2-35
Sunroof (if so equipped) ........................... 2-37 Electric sunroof .................................... 2-38 Rear control cancel switch (if so equipped).............................................. 2-39
Rear sun shade (if so equipped)............... 2-39 Rear door window sun shade (if so equipped).............................................. 2-41
Interior lights ............................................. 2-41 Personal lights........................................... 2-42
Front ..................................................... 2-42 Rear ...................................................... 2-42 Vanity mirror lights.................................... 2-43 Trunk light ................................................. 2-43 HomeLink Universal Transceiver............. 2-43 Programming HomeLink .................... 2-44 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers............................................. 2-46 Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver ........................................... 2-46
Programming trouble diagnosis........... 2-46 Clearing the programmed information........................................... 2-47 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button ................................................... 2-47
If your vehicle is stolen........................ 2-47
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2
SII0392
1. Outside mirror remote control (P .3-21)
2. Headlight/turn signal switch (P .2-21) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio control (P .4-33) 4. Meters and gauges (P .2-3) 5. Driver supplemental air bag (P .1-7) 6. Cruise control main/set switch (P .5-17)
Intelligent cruise control switch (P .5-25) 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P .2-20) 8. Ignition switch (P .5-7) 9. Security indicator light (P .2-17) 10. Center ventilator (P .4-12) 11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P .2-26) 12. Display, Climate and Audio control
switches/buttons (P .4-3)/Navigation system* 13. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P .1-7) 14. Instrument brightness control (P .2-25) 15. Headlight aiming control switch (P .2-24) 16. Vehicle dynamic control OFF switch (P .2-30) 17. Hood release handle (P .3-11) 18. Active damper suspension mode selector
(P .2-29) 19. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch
(P .3-19) 20. Fuse box cover (P .8-24) 21. Parking brake pedal/parking brake release
pedal (P .5-16) 22. CD changer (P .4-31) 23. Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P .2-31) 24. Automatic transmission selector lever (P .5-10) 25. Front heated seat switch (P .2-27) 26. Clock (P .2-30)
27. Cassette deck (P .4-22) 28. Glove box (P .2-33)
See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual. (if so equipped)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
METERS AND GAUGES
1. Speedometer 2. Odometer/twin trip odometer 3. Tachometer 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge 5. Fuel gauge
SII0384
6. Warming/indicator lights 7. Intelligent cruise control system display
2-3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
TACHOMETER
SII0325
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
SII0326
Changing the display: Pushing the reset knob changes the display as follows: TRIP A TRIP B TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.
SII0412
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.
2-4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
SII0328
The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See the "In case of emergency" section for immediate action required.
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.
SII0405
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.
The indicator light comes on when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches "E". There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches "E".
2-5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the passenger's side of the vehicle.
COMPASS
CAUTION
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as
soon as possible. After a few driv-
ing trips, the
lamp should
turn off. If the lamp remains on af-
ter a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected by an INFINITI
dealer .
For additional information, see "Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)" later in this section.
2-6
SII0399
When the COMP switch is pushed to ON, the compass display will indicate the heading direction the vehicle is heading. N: north E: east S: south W: west If the display reads "C", calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete circles.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:
1. Press the COMP switch for more than 3 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance number on the zone map.
3. Press the COMP switch until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the switch in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction:
SII0114
1. With the display turned on, push the
2-7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
COMP switch for 3 seconds, until the zone selection comes up (a number will be displayed in the mirror compass window).
2. Toggle until correct zone is found and release switch.
3. The display will show all segments, and return to the normal compass mode within 10 seconds of no switch activity.
4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1 thru 3. See map.
If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an INFINITI dealer .
The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
2-8
CAUTION
Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc. which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Anti-lock brake warning
or
light
Low tire pressure warning light
Automatic transmission check warning light
Seat belt warning light
or
Brake warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Charge warning light Preview Function warning light (Orange: if so equipped) Door open warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Automatic transmission position indicator light
Cruise main switch indicator light (Green) Intelligent cruise control system ON/OFF switch indicator light (White; if so equipped) Intelligent cruise control system warning light (Orange; if so equipped)
Low fuel warning light
Cruise set switch indicator light
High beam indicator light (Blue)
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Slip indicator light Sport mode indicator light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light
CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition
key to ON without starting the engine. The
following lights will come on:
,
or
,
,
The following lights come on briefly and then
go off:
,
or
, ,,
,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system checked by
your INFINITI dealer.
WARNING LIGHTS
or
Anti-lock brake
warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your INFINITI dealer.
2-9
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate normally.
If the light comes on while you are driving, contact your INFINITI dealer for repair.
Automatic transmission check warning light
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light blinks for approximately 8 seconds, it may indicate the transmission is not functioning properly. Have your INFINITI dealer check and repair the transmission.
or
Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition key is in the ON position,
2-10
the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light: When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See "Brake fluid" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct:
Have the warning system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning
light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed.
Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at an INFINITI dealer.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Charge warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your INFINITI dealer immediately.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the belt is loose, broken or missing. See "If your vehicle overheats" in the "6. In case of emergency" section.
Preview Function warning light (Orange: if so equipped)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Brake Assist (with Preview Function) system.
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.
Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call an INFINITI dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See "Engine oil" in the "8. Maintenance and do-ityourself" section.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the oil pres-
sure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E.
There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E.
Low tire pressure warning light
This light warns of low tire pressure.
INFINITI's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
2-11
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner's manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with a very low
2-12
tire pressure (lower than 25 psi), the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds.
For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning system" in the "5. Starting and driving" section and "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of emergency" section. Also, you can check the pressure of all 4 tires on the monitor display. See "Vehicle information" in the "4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems" section.
WARNING
If the light does not come on with the key switch turned ON, have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
If the light comes on while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce
vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four wheels and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, you can continue driving after you have a flat tire. However, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced,
which could lead to an accident and personal injury. See "Wheels and tires" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section for more details and make sure to observe the cautions about runflat tires. Failure to do so may result in a serious accident.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated and the low tire pressure warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
CAUTION
The low tire pressure warning sys-
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
tem is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.
If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the low tire pressure warning system may not operate correctly.
Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.
Seat belt warning light and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated until the driver's seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will
sound for about 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened.
See "Seat belts" in the "1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems" section for precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag warning light
After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt are operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, supplemental curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt needs servicing and your INFINITI must be taken to your nearest INFINITI dealer.
2-13
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint Systems and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. For additional information, see "Supplemental restraint system" in the "1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems" section.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner
2-14
seat belt will not operate in an accident.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic transmission position indicator light
When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the indicator shows the automatic selector shift position. See "Driving with automatic transmission", in the "5. Starting and driving" section.
Cruise main switch indicator light (Green)
The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. While the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational.
Intelligent cruise control system ON/OFF switch indicator light (White; if so equipped)
The light comes on when the Intelligent Cruise Control ON/OFF switch is pushed. The light goes out when the ON/OFF switch is pushed again. While the ON/OFF switch indicator light comes on, the system is operational.
Intelligent cruise control system warning light (Orange; if so equipped)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Intelligent Cruise Control system.
Cruise set switch indicator light
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by your INFINITI dealer.
High beam indicator light (Blue)
This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
lamp
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
Operation
The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in one of two ways:
Malfunction indicator lamp on steady --
An emission control system malfunction
has been detected. Check the fuel filler
cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The
lamp should turn off after a few
driving trips. If the
lamp does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer.
You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
Malfunction indicator lamp blinking -- An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system.
To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h).
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, re-
2-15
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
duced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
Sport mode indicator light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the active damper suspension mode select switch is set to the SPORT position.
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.
Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light
The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF . This indicates the vehicle dynamic control system and traction control system are not operating. When the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light and slip indicator light come on with the vehicle dynamic control system turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle dynamic control system's fail-safe mode is operating, i.e. the vehicle dynamic control system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked by your INFINITI dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the vehicle dynamic control system function will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For additional information, see "Vehicle dynamic control system (VDC)" in the "5. Starting and driving" section of this manual.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime
A chime will sound if the driver side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened if the light switch is in the or
position (ignition switch is turned off).
Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
2-16
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows:
Vehicle security
Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System
The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals to deter theft of the vehicle.
Security indicator light
SII0330
How to activate the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows. The system can be activated even if the windows are open. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk
lid. The doors can be locked either with a key, key fob or door lock knob.
4. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security indicator light glows for about 30 seconds and then blinks. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door or trunk lid is unlocked by the key or the key fob, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not activate. However, when the trunk lid is closed after being unlocked with a key or key fob, the system returns to the armed phase.
Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood, and trunk lid locked and ignition key off. When turning the ignition to ACC, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system operation
The warning system will give the following alarm:
2-17
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
the headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.
the alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds; however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
The alarm is activated by:
Unlocking the door or opening the trunk lid without using the key or electronic ignition key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob or the trunk lid is opened by operating the trunk lid release switch, the alarm is activated.)
Opening the hood.
How to stop alarm
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door with the key or by pushing the unlock button on the electronic ignition key. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON.
If the system does not operate as de-
scribed above, have it checked by your INFINITI dealer.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Infiniti electronic ignition key. The engine may not start with the registered electronic ignition key under the following conditions:
SIP0281B
2-18
1 If metal contacts the electronic ignition key.
2 If a device equipped with a transponder contacts the electronic ignition key.
If the engine fails to start using the registered electronic ignition key (for example, when interference is caused by another electronic ignition key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered electronic ignition key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI recommends placing the registered electronic ignition key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT ASSY - IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY - IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFACTURE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER'S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
Security indicator light
switch, the indicator light comes on.
If the Infiniti Vehicle immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see your INFINITI dealer for Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all electronic ignition keys that you have when visiting your INFINITI dealer for service.
SII0330
This light blinks whenever the ignition key is removed for 5 seconds after the ignition switch is OFF . This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.
If a non-registered key is in the ignition
2-19
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
When the vehicle speed is continuously high, so is the intermittent operation speed.
Low: Continuous low speed operation
High: Continuous high speed operation
Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
SII0331A
SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition key is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer.
The intermittent operation speed is as follows:
When the vehicle speed is continuously low, so is the intermittent operation speed.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
The following could damage the washer system:
REAR WINDOW AND OUT SIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH
SII0216B
2-20
To defog/defrost the rear window glass and the outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. (The indicator light will come on.) Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
The automatic turn off time can be adjusted. For more information, see "Vehicle information" in the "4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems" section.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster .
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an INFINITI dealer .
Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver
or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals, (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced.
2-21
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact an INFINITI dealer.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Lighting
plate and instrument lights will come on.
2 Turn the switch to the
position:
Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.
Autolight system
SII0410
1 Turn the switch to the
position:
The front park, side marker, tail, license
2-22
SII0411
The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. To set the autolight system: 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position 1 .
2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF ,
, or
position.
The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark, turn off the headlights when it is light, and keep the headlights on for up to 45 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and open any door then close all the doors.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain ON for five minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay
For automatic headlights off delay setting, see "Automatic headlights off delay" in the "4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems" section.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SII0082B
Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top lefthand side of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.
Headlight beam select
SII0407A
1 To select the low beam, put the lever in the neutral position as shown.
2 To select the high beam, push the lever forward while the switch is in the position. Pull it back to select the low beam.
3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam even when the headlight switch is in the OFF position.
Battery saver system
When the headlight switch is in the
or
position while the ignition
key is in the ON position, the lights will
automatically turn off 45 seconds after the
ignition switch has been turned to the OFF
position. However, the lights will turn off if
the driver's or front passenger's door is
opened in this condition.
When the headlight switch remains in the
or
position after the lights
automatically turn off, the lights will turn
on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position from the OFF position.
CAUTION
When you turn on the headlight switch again after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will
2-23
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged.
Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time.
Headlight aiming control
Depending on the number of occupants in the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be lowered with the operation of the switch.
The larger the number designated on the switch, the lower the axis.
When traveling with no heavy load or on a flat road, select position 0.
WARNING
Xenon headlights are extremely bright compared to conventional headlights. If the xenon headlights hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the on-
SII0224
2-24
coming vehicle, the driver of these vehicles may have difficulty driving because of the brightness. Use the headlight aiming control switch to lower the light axis. See "Headlight and turn signal switch" earlier in this section for information on xenon headlights.
Daytime running light system (Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the
position for full illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.
Instrument brightness control
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
SII0042
The instrument brightness control operates
when the light switch is in the AUTO (ignition
key is in the ON),
or
position.
Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights.
When the control is turned in the maximum brightening direction, the light intensity will be at maximum. When the control is turned in the maximum darkening direction, the light will be turned off.
SII0408A
1 Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
2 Lane change signal
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.
2-25
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
SII0335
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash.
WARNING
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.
HORN
SII0175
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag sys-
2-26
tem may result in serious personal injury.
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
SII0336
The front seats or rear seats (if so equipped) are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the center console and on the inside of the rear door. 1. Start the engine.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2. Push the low or high position of the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.
CAUTION
Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
Any liquid spilled on the heating seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
When cleaning the seat, never use benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
If any abnormalities are found or the heating seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your INFINITI dealer.
The battery could run down if the heater is operated while the engine is not running.
2-27
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT (if so equipped)
SII0393
The climate controlled seat warms and cools down the front seats by blowing warm or cool air from the surface of the seat. The switches located on the seats can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select HEAT or COOL by pressing either
side of the switch. The climate controlled seat controls the 2-28
amount of the air and its temperature according to the number on the dial; higher is more.
3. Adjust the desired temperature using the control dial. HEAT position: 1 (Normal) 4 (Warm) COOL position: 1 (Normal) 4 (Cool) When cool position 1 is selected, cooling does not operate, air at room temperature will be provided.
The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approximately 60 seconds after turning the switch on or selecting the desired temperature.
4. When the vehicle's interior is warmed or cooled, and/or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch to the OFF position (center). To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, contact your INFINITI dealer .
CAUTION
The battery could run down if the climate controlled seat is operated while the engine is not running.
Do not use the climate controlled seat for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat.
Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
The climate controlled seat has an air filter. Do not operate climate controlled seat without an air filter. This may result in damage to the system.
When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials.
If any abnormalities are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your INFINITI dealer.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ACTIVE DAMPER SUSPENSION MODE SELECT SWITCH (if so equipped)
SII0337
The active damper suspension controls damping force and helps minimize the movement of the vehicle body. It helps stable driving when the vehicle moves up and down on large rolling roads or when the vehicle body leans during cornering with a high centrifugal force. The damping force of the shock absorbers can be adjusted to the level you desire. Set the
switch to the position you desire while the ignition switch is ON.
AUTO MODE
Set the switch to the AUTO position for normal driving. The damping force will automatically adjust according to the road surface and driving conditions.
SPORT MODE
Set the switch to the SPORT position when you desire a firm feeling all the time.
2-29
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL OFF SWITCH
SII0338
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System ON for most driving conditions. When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. 2-30
To cancel the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-
tem (VDC), push the VDC OFF switch to turn
off the system. The
indicator will come
on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system. See "Vehicle dynamic control system (VDC)" in the "5. Starting and driving" section.
CLOCK
SII0413
If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time.
Readjust the time.
ADJUSTING THE TIME
To adjust the time, turn the adjusting knob.
POWER OUTLET
SII0387
CAUTION
Use caution as the socket and plug may be hot during or immediately
after use.
Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.)
Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on.
This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit.
Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the in-
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ternal temperature fuse may blow.
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure to turn off the power switch of the electrical accessory being used or the ACC power of the vehicle.
When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.
CIGARETTE LIGHTERS AND ASHTRA YS
SII0341
The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push the lighter in all the way, then release it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use. To empty the ashtray, pull up on the horizontal bar and remove the tray.
2-31
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.
STORAGE CUP HOLDERS
SII0342
WARNING
The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
CAUTION
The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter
2-32
SII0343A
SII0092A
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down lightly. Use the cup holder properly and according to the size of the cups. The front cup holder inner case can be removed to hold bigger bottles.
WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup
holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
GLOVE BOX
SII0354
To open, push the cup holder opener switch.
CAUTION
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or
SII0344
When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the emergency key or wallet key. The glove box may be opened by pulling the handle when unlocked.
2-33
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
Keep the glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
CONSOLE BOX
SII0358
Upper part: Push the button on the side of the lid to
open the upper part sideways. The lid can be opened from the driver and
front passenger seats.
The front part is designed to be used as a coin case.
To open the lid, the right and left sides it must be closed securely. Lower part: While pushing up the button, open the cover. Bottom case: Push the button on the front of the bottom case to open the lids. To close the lids, manually push the lids sideway.
WARNING
The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
2-34
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keep the center console box lid closed while driving to prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
CARGO NET
CAUTION
Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net.
WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS
SII0394
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while your vehicle is driven.
To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the retainers.
WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could
unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in the vehicle. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the driver's or front passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is cancelled.
2-35
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Automatic operation (For all door windows)
SII0345
SII0346
To open or close the window, push down or The passenger side switch will open or close
pull up the switch and hold it. The main only the corresponding window. To open or
SII0347
switch (driver side switches) will open or close the window, hold the switch down or up.
close all the windows.
Locking passenger's windows
When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.
2-36
SII0348
To fully open or close the window, completely push down or pull up the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just press or lift the switch in the opposite direction.
A light press or pull on the switch will cause the window to open or close until the switch is released.
Auto reverse function
If the control unit detects something caught in
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before clos-
ing the window.
SUNROOF (if so equipped)
WARNING
In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing.
CAUTION
Remove water drops, snow, ice or
2-37
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
sand from the sunroof before opening.
Do not place heavy objects on the sunroof or surrounding area.
Sliding the sunroof
ELECTRIC SUNROOF
The sunroof operates when the ignition key is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the driver's, or passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.
2-38
SII0349
To open the roof, press and hold the switch to the open side.
To close the roof, press and hold the switch to the closed side.
Automatic operation:
To fully open the sunroof, completely press the switch to the open side; it need not be held. The sunroof will automatically open all the way. To stop the sunroof, just press the switch toward the close side, or press the up
or down side of the tilt switch.
Auto reverse function (When closing the sunroof)
If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it is closing, the sunroof will immediately open backward.
The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof occurs.
Tilting the sunroof
To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press and hold the up side of the tilt switch. To tilt
down the sunroof, press and hold the down side.
Sun shade
Open/close the sun shade by sliding it backward/forward.
The shade will open automatically when the sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.
If the sunroof does not close
Have your INFINITI dealer check and repair the sunroof.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
REAR CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)
SII0391
Turning the rear control cancel switch to cancel side will inactivate the following switches in the rear center armrest. Air conditioner Audio Rear sun shade
REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port.
Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system. They could be injured.
Do not place objects on or near the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.
Do not pull or push the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.
2-39
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The rear sun shade operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.
The rear sun shade switches are located on the front overhead console and the rear armrest.
To raise the screen, push the upper side of the switch.
To lower the screen, push the lower side of the switch.
The switch need not be held down.
CAUTION
Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the screen.
SII0356
2-40
Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.
Do not put any object into the screen inlet port as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen.
Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen.
Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing so may elongate the screen. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.
REAR DOOR WINDOW SUN SHADE (if so equipped)
SII0360
The rear door window sun shades are built in the door sash. To use the shade, pull it out and hook on the opposite side sash. To fold the shade, release the hooks gently.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior light has a three-position switch.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SII0351
While the switch is in the center position, the front and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following conditions:
driver's door is unlocked.
-- remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.
driver's door is opened.
-- remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after driver's door is closed.
ignition key is removed from key cylinder.
-- remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.
The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ACC position, or the driver's door is closed and locked.
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes while doors are open.
When some doors are opened, the door step light for each open door and some personal lights will come on, and the closed door's personal lights will darken. See "Personal lights" later in this section.
2-41
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The amount of time that the light remains on can be adjusted. See "Vehicle information" in the "4. Monitor, climate, audio and voiceactivated control systems" section.
PERSONAL LIGHTS FRONT
CAUTION
Leaving the light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time will result in a discharged battery.
2-42
REAR
SII0361
SII0352 The lights will turn on/off depending on what side of the switch is pressed: 1 The light stays on when pressed to this position. 2 When the door is opened, both the right and left lights come on. They turn off when the door is closed. If the interior light switch is in OFF position, the personal light will not turn on when the any of the doors are opened. See "Interior lights"
earlier in this section.
3 When the switch is pressed, both right and left lights come on.
SII0404
Console light
The light will turn on when the headlight
switch is turned to the
or
posi-
tion.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
SII0101
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light will go off.
HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver power will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the off position.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver:
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle's battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming.
2-43
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to "Programming HomeLink" later in this section.
WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming.
Your vehicle's engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver .
PROGRAMMING HomeLink
To program your HomeLink Transceiver to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. Note: Garage door openers (manufactured after 1996) have "rolling code protection". To program a garage door opener equipped with "rolling code protection"; you will need to use a ladder to get up to the garage door opener motor to be able to access the "smart or learn" program button.
2-44
SII0395
1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light blinks slowly (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLink surface.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SII0396
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes, changing from a "slow blink" to a "rapidly flashing blink". This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly
flashing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other programmed device, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button - releasing when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a "rolling code" garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another person for convenience.
6. Press and release the "smart" or "learn" program button located on the garage door opener's motor to activate the "training mode". This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button.
2-45
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE:
Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door opener's motor and the "training light" is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. Use the help of a second person for convenience to assist when performing this step.
7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the garage door opener program button, firmly press and release the HomeLink button you've just programmed. Press and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the training.
8. Your HomeLink button should now be programmed. (To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step one unless you want
2-46
to "clear" all previously programmed HomeLink buttons).
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, please refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-6626200.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink, continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under "Programming HomeLink ") while you press and re-press ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming).
NOTE:
If programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.
OPERATING THE HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
position the hand-held transmitter with its
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface.
press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.
position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owner's Manual.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however
to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
2-47
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
2-48
3 PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Keys (Electronic ignition key)...................... 3-2 Doors ........................................................... 3-3
Locking with key (Driver's door only) ... 3-4 Opening and closing windows ............... 3-4 Locking with inside lock knob ............... 3-4 Locking with power door lock switch.... 3-5 Child safety rear door lock..................... 3-5 Remote keyless entry system ..................... 3-5 How to use remote keyless entry system .................................................... 3-7 Electronic key ....................................... 3-10 Battery replacement ............................. 3-10 Hood .......................................................... 3-11 Trunk lid .................................................... 3-12 Opener operation.................................. 3-12 Key operation ....................................... 3-13 Auto closure ........................................ 3-13 Auto open & close trunk lid (if so equipped)................................................... 3-14
Interior trunk lid release....................... 3-16 Fuel filler lid............................................... 3-17
Opener operation.................................. 3-17 Fuel filler cap........................................ 3-17 Tilting telescopic steering column ............ 3-19 Tilt operation........................................ 3-19 Telescopic operation ............................ 3-19 Sun visors.................................................. 3-20 Using the sun visors ............................ 3-20 Mirrors....................................................... 3-20 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror....... 3-20 Outside mirrors .................................... 3-21 Automatic drive positioner ........................ 3-22 Memory storage function..................... 3-22 Entry/exit function ............................... 3-24 System operation ................................. 3-25
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
KEYS (Electronic ignition key)
SIP0276A
The master electronic ignition keys have a transponder . 3-2
When the master electronic ignition key is inserted in the steering lock position, verification of the transponder ID will start automatically. If the ID code is judged to be correct, the steering lock pin will be released, allowing the key to turn and start the engine.
You can only drive your vehicle using the master electronic ignition keys which are registered to the Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip. (The wallet key and emergency key cannot be used to start and drive your vehicle.)
The emergency key and wallet key can be used for all locks.
When the key case with the wallet key is placed into your wallet, be careful not to apply excessive force to the wallet as it or other cards could be damaged.
SIP0277A
How to use the emergency key
If the remote control system cannot be used due to a discharged battery, use the emergency key to lock or unlock the glove box, doors and trunk lid.
Removing the key
Release the lock knob at the rear of the master electronic ignition key and remove the emergency key.
To install the emergency key to the master electronic ignition key, securely lock the
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
lock knob and then check that the emergency key will not move.
The emergency key cannot be used to start the engine, but it can be used to release the steering lock.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Record the key number on the key number plate supplied with your keys and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. INFINITI does not record any key number so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all emergency keys and wallet key, and do not have one to duplicate. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your INFINITI dealer.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY - Master electronic ignition keys:
As many as 4 Infiniti electronic ignition keys can be used with one vehicle. New keys must
be registered to the Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle by your INFINITI dealer. Bring all Infiniti electronic ignition keys to your INFINITI dealer for registration. The registration process will erase all memory of the Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System components so all keys require registration.
DOORS
WARNING
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
3-3
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
LOCKING WITH KEY (Driver's door only)
SIP0292
Manual
To lock the door, turn the driver's door key toward the front of the vehicle. To unlock, turn it toward the rear.
Power
The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. Turning the driver's door key to the front of 3-4
the vehicle will lock all doors.
Turning the driver's door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the driver's door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted.) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
The driver's door key operation allows you to open and close all door windows simultaneously.
To open the windows, turn the driver's door key to the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
To close the windows, turn the driver's door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked.
The rear door windows will operate 0.5 second after the front windows' operation. The door windows will open or close while turning the driver's door key. This function will operate after the ignition switch is off and 45 seconds passed or either the front door is opened.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
SIP0092
To lock the doors from the outside without a key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position, then close the door. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
SIP0278
Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock or unlock all doors. (driver and front passenger sides)
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
SIP0005
The child safety lock helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
When the lever is in the lock position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, open all windows, release the trunk lid and activate the panic alarm by using the electronic ignition key (electronic key) from outside the vehicle. Before locking the doors, make sure the key is not left in the vehicle. The electronic key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as 4 electronic keys can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional electronic keys, contact your INFINITI dealer.
The electronic keys will not function when:
3-5
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
the battery is discharged,
the distance between the vehicle and the electronic key is over 33 ft (10 m),
the electronic key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
The following conditions or occurrences will damage the electronic key.
Do not allow the electronic key to become wet.
Do not drop the electronic key.
Do not strike the electronic key sharply against another object.
Do not place the electronic key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
If a electronic key is lost or stolen, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code of that electronic key. This will prevent the electronic key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact an INFINITI dealer.
3-6
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
The factory setting of the remote keyless entry system is in hazard indicator and horn mode.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
SIP0289
LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.
If hazard indicator and horn mode is not necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator
only mode by following the switching procedure.
In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice.
When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.
(Switching procedure)
Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the electronic key simultaneously for more than 2 seconds to switch from one mode to the other .
When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.
3-7
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3-8
SIP0279B
Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Push the LOCK button on the electronic key.
4. All the doors will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
When the LOCK button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK button on the electronic key once.
Only the driver's door unlocks The hazard indicator flashes once. The interior light turns on and the light
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
timer activates for 30 seconds when the switch is in the center position.
2. Push the UNLOCK button on the electronic key again within 5 seconds.
All doors unlock
The hazard indicator flashes once.
5 minutes after pressing the UNLOCK button, all doors will be locked automatically under following conditions.
When any door is not opened.
When the ignition key is not set in the ON position.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the electronic key.
Opening windows
The electronic key operation allows you to open all door windows simultaneously.
To open the windows, press the UNLOCK button on the electronic key for longer than 3 seconds after the door is unlocked.
The rear door windows will operate 0.5 second after the front windows' operation. The door windows will open while pressing the UNLOCK button on the electronic key. This function will operate after the ignition switch is off and 45 seconds passed or either the front door is opened.
This opening windows function of the electronic key can be suspended. Please contact an INFINITI dealer.
The door windows cannot be closed by using the electronic key.
Releasing the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk button on the electronic key for longer than 0.5 seconds with the key removed from the key cylinder.
2. The trunk lid opens.
The trunk lid will not open with the trunk lid release cancel switch turned to OFF. See "Trunk lid" later in this section for the cancel switch. If the cancel switch is turned to OFF, the trunk lid can be opened only with the key.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:
1. Push the panic button on the electronic key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
2. The vehicle security alarm and headlights will stay on for 30 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
It has run for 30 seconds, or The LOCK or UNLOCK button is
pressed, or
The panic button on the electronic key
3-9
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
is pushed for longer than 0.5 seconds.
ELECTRONIC KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
3-10
SIP0280
Replace the battery as follows:
1. Remove the emergency key and the screw from the electronic key.
2. Remove the outer case.
3. Open the inner case using a suitable tool.
4. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent
Make sure that the side faces the bottom of the case.
5. Close the inner case securely.
6. Assemble the outer case.
7. Press the key button two or three times to check its operation.
See your INFINITI dealer if you need any assistance for replacement.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5 above.
An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
The electronic key is water-proof; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
HOOD
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
1. Pull the hood lock release handle located below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly.
2. Pull the lever at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood.
3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.
SIP0282
WARNING
Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
If you see steam or smoke coming
3-11
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
from the engine compartment, avoid injury by not opening the hood.
closed, when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
Cancel switch
TRUNK LID
WARNING
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See "Exhaust gas" in the "5. Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk
OPENER OPERATION
The trunk lid release switch is located under the driver's armrest.
SIP0097
To open the trunk lid, pull the release switch. To close, push the trunk lid down.
SIP0283
When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF , the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch or the key fob. It can be opened only with the emergency key or wallet key.
3-12
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
KEY OPERATION
force applied may cause the mechanism to malfunction.
SIP0284
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close remove the key, lower and push the trunk lid down.
AUTO CLOSURE
If the trunk lid is pulled down to a partly open position, the lid will pull itself to the closed position.
Do not apply excessive force when the auto closure is operating. Excessive
CAUTION
The lid will automatically close from a partly open position. To avoid pinching, keep hands and fingers away from trunk opening.
Do not let children operate the trunk lid.
3-13
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
AUTO OPEN & CLOSE TRUNK LID (if so equipped)
3-14
SIP0319
To automatically open or close the trunk lid, operate the remote controller, trunk opener, or closing switch.
CAUTION
Make sure there is no one around the trunk before operation. Be careful not to pinch your fingers, arms or neck as the trunk will open or close automatically.
A buzzer will sound during operation, stand away from the trunk lid.
Do not leave the vehicle before the trunk lid closes completely.
Do not overload the trunk. Otherwise, when the trunk lid is closed automatically, the lid or load could be damaged or deformed.
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
The automatic function may not operate if the wind is strong, or when the trunk lid is covered by snow or frozen.
If a heavy accessory is attached to the trunk lid, the automatic function may not operate.
Do not operate the automatic function when leaning against the trunk lid or with a load on the trunk lid.
Do not operate the automatic function in a car wash.
If opening and closing operations are performed continuously, a protection circuit may operate to cancel operations.
If the engine is started during automatic operation, an erroneous operation may occur .
The automatic trunk opening and closing mechanism will not operate under the following conditions: when the selector lever is in a position other than P when the vehicle speed is above 7 km/h (11 MPH)
The automatic operation will be canceled if the following is performed during automatic trunk opening or closing operation. when the trunk opener is pulled when the remote controller trunk switch is pushed for more than 0.5 seconds when the closing switch is pushed when the selector lever is shifted to a position other than P when the vehicle speed is above 7 km/h (11 MPH) when trunk lid closing operation is stopped by hand before the auto closure mechanism operates
How to use the trunk opener
Pull the opener located on the lower portion of the driver's door armrest to unlock the trunk lid.
Pull on the opener for about 1 second until a peep sound is heard. The trunk will open automatically all the way.
When the anti-theft alarm is set, it is not possible to unlock the trunk with the trunk opener .
Refer to how to cancel the trunk opener.
Opening with the remote controller
Approach the trunk and push the trunk button on the remote controller for about 0.5 seconds. The trunk will be unlocked.
After unlocking the trunk, push the trunk button on the remote controller for about 0.5 seconds. The trunk will open automatically all the way.
3-15
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Opening without using automatic operation
If you do not want to use the automatic function (such as in the rain), the trunk will only be unlocked by the following operations:
when the trunk opener is pulled for less than 1 second
when the trunk switch on the remote controller is pushed only once
Closing
Push and hold the close switch on the trunk lid for about 1 second until a peep sound is heard. The trunk lid will close automatically all the way.
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
SIP0291
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed, when not in use, and
prevent children's access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.
To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located on the trunk lid inside the trunk compartment.
3-16
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER OPERATION
SIP0226
To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener switch. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.
FUEL FILLER CAP
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.
Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a third of a turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent personal injury from fuel spraying out. Then remove the cap.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and a possible fire.
Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid,
3-17
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: · Always place the container
on the ground when filling. · Do not use electronic devices
while filling. · Keep the pump nozzle in con-
tact with the container while you are filling it. · Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush it away with water to avoid
3-18
paint damage.
Tighten until the fuel filler cap
clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel
filler cap properly may cause the
malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) to illuminate. If the
lamp illuminates because
the fuel filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap
and continue to drive the vehicle.
The
lamp should turn off
after a few driving trips. If the
lamp does not turn off after
a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected by an INFINITI
dealer. For additional informa-
tion, see "Malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL)" in the "2. Instru-
ments and controls" section.
SIP0322
The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.
TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
TILT OPERATION
SIP0287
Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position.
Move up operation
The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily.
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel
forward or backward to the desired position.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.
3-19
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
SUN VISORS USING THE SUN VISORS
CAUTION
Store the main sun visor after storing the sub-sun visor and the extension sun visor.
Do not pull the sub-sun visor and the extension sun visor forcefully downward.
1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side.
3. Then, to block glare from the front too, swing down the sub-sun visor.
3-20
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE MIRROR
SIP0320
SIP0272
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you.
When the inside mirror switch is in the AUTO position, excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. When the switch of the inside mirror is in the
OFF position, the inside mirror will operate normally. Do not hang any object on the sensor or apply glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper operation.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
SIP0288
The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Turn the switch to the L or R side to select the
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
left or right side mirror, then adjust using the control button.
These mirrors will be heated when the rear window defogger switch is operated.
Foldable outside mirrors
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.
IPD073M
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the rear of the vehicle.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped)
When the following conditions are met, the selected mirror surface will turn downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.
1. The ignition switch is ON.
3-21
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2. The outside mirror control switch is turned to L or R.
3. The shift lever is moved to R (Reverse).
After the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse), the mirror surface selected in step 2 will turn downward.
The selected mirror surface will return to its original position when any of the following have occurred:
The shift lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).
The outside mirror control switch is set to the N (Neutral) position.
The ignition switch is turned OFF .
For more information regarding this feature and how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down adjustment in the "Automatic drive positioner" memory, refer to "Automatic drive positioner" later in this section.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
The automatic drive positioner system has two features: Memory storage Entry/exit function
SIP0286
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver's seat, steering column, and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Fol-
3-22
low these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Adjust the driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see "Seats" in the "Safety -- Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags" section and "Steering wheel" and "Outside mirrors" earlier in this section.
During this step, do not turn the ignition to any positions other than ON.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.
The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for
approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the selected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2).
If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.
Procedure for storing the outside mirror positions for best visibility when backing up
Two outside mirror positions for backing up can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the engine.)
3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second to operate the automatic drive positioner.
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4. Turn the outside mirror control switch to L (left).
5. Depress the brake pedal.
6. Move the automatic transmission shift lever to R (Reverse).
7. Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing position for backing up by operating the outside mirror control switch.
8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 selected in step 3 fully for at least 1 second.
The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the selected mirror position is stored in the selected memory (1 or 2).
9. Turn the outside mirror control switch to R (right).
Repeat the above procedure to adjust the right mirror position and store in the selected memory.
When the driver's seat, outside mirror and steering column are not in the memorized position, the outside mirror will move with the initial tilt-down angle, if the reverse tilt-down position is stored.
Linking an electronic key to a stored memory position
An electronic key can be linked to a stored memory position with the following procedure.
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory position.
2. While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the electronic key. The indicator light will blink. After the indicator light goes off, the
3-23
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
electronic key is linked to that memory setting.
With the key removed from the ignition switch, press the "UNLOCK" button on the electronic key. The driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position.
Confirming memory storage
Turn the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following procedures.
1. Open and close the driver's door more
3-24
than two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position.
2. Reset the desired position using the previous procedure.
Selecting the memorized position
1. Set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.
The driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light flashing, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver's seat, steering column and outside mirror will automatically move when the automatic trans-
mission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver's seat more easily.
The driver's seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up:
When the key is removed from the ignition switch.
When the driver's door is opened with the key turned to LOCK.
When the key is turned from ACC to LOCK with the driver's door open while the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
The driver's seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:
When the key is inserted into the ignition switch.
When the driver's door is closed with the key turned to LOCK.
PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
When the key is turned from ACC to ON while the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or canceled. See "Vehicle electronic systems" in the "Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems" section of this manual.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:
when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h).
when any two or more of the memory switches are simultaneously pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
when the adjusting switch for the driver's seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
when the memory switch (1 or 2) is not pushed for at least 1 second.
when the seat has been already moved to the memorized position.
when no seat position is stored in the memory switch.
The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled. See "Vehicle electronic systems" in the "Monitor, Climate, Audio and Voice-activated control systems" section of this manual.
3-25
4 MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Safety note................................................... 4-2 Control panel button functions .................. 4-3
Names of the components.................... 4-3 How to use joystick and "ENTER" button.................................................... 4-4 How to use "PREV" button ................... 4-4 The start-up screen (for models with navigation system) ...................................... 4-5 How to use the "SETTING" button............. 4-5 "Audio" settings .................................... 4-6 "Display" settings .................................. 4-6 Vehicle electronic systems..................... 4-7 Language/unit (for models without navigation system) ........................................... 4-9 Rear view monitor (if so equipped) .......... 4-10 How to read the displayed lines .......... 4-10 Adjusting the screen ............................ 4-11 Operating tips....................................... 4-11 Ventilators.................................................. 4-12 Automatic climate control.......................... 4-13
Automatic operation............................. 4-14 Manual operation ................................. 4-16 Ambient temperature............................ 4-16 Rear control button (if so equipped) ... 4-17 Operating tips....................................... 4-17 In-cabin microfilter............................... 4-17 Servicing climate control........................... 4-18 Audio system............................................. 4-18 Radio .................................................... 4-18 FM radio reception ............................... 4-19 AM radio reception............................... 4-19 Satellite radio reception ....................... 4-20 Audio operation precautions ................ 4-20 FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) changer ........................ 4-22 CD care and cleaning ........................... 4-32 Steering wheel switch for audio control .................................................. 4-33 Audio rear control switch (if so equipped).............................................. 4-34
Antenna ................................................ 4-35 Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-35 Vehicle information.................................... 4-36
Vehicle information display.................. 4-36 Trip computer information................... 4-36 Fuel economy information ................... 4-37 Maintenance information...................... 4-37 Tire pressure information .................... 4-38 Voice-activated control system (VACS) ... 4-39
Features................................................ 4-39 Using the system ................................. 4-40 Personal vocabulary ............................. 4-41 How to say numbers............................ 4-41 Voice command descriptions............... 4-41 Speaker adaptation (SA) mode ............ 4-45 Trouble-shooting guide........................ 4-48
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
SAFETY NOTE
WARNING
Adjusting of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to driving operation.
Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.
Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest INFINITI dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock.
4-2
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
CONTROL PANEL BUTTON FUNCTIONS
SIH0137
When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
"ENTER" button
This is a button on the control panel.
"Display" key
This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.
NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS
1. "AUTO" automatic climate control ON button; refer to page 4-13.
2. Temperature control knob (driver only or driver and passenger); refer to page 4-13.
4-3
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
3. "OFF" button for climate control system off.
4. "AUTO PASS" ON button (passenger side); refer to page 4-14.
5. Temperature control knob (passenger side); refer to page 4-14.
6. " " front defogger button; refer to page 4-15.
7. Air recirculation " ", fresh " " button; refer to page 4-16.
8. " " rear window defogger button; refer to the "2. Instruments and controls" section.
9. "AUDIO" ON button; refer to page 4-23.
10.Volume control knob for audio
11."OFF" button for audio
12."FMAM" AM, FM1 and FM2 band select button; refer to page 4-23.
4-4
13."SAT" satellite band select button; refer to page 4-24.
14."TAPE" play button; refer to page 4-25.
15."CD" play button; refer to page 4-25.
16."PTY" program type button; refer to page 4-24.
17.A/C and audio control button "
" to
"
"; refer to page 4-13 and 4-22.
18."SETTING" button for audio, display and Vehicle Electronic Systems; refer to page 4-5.
19.JOYSTICK and "ENTER" push button; refer to the right column.
20."PREV" previous button; refer to the right column.
21."INFO" vehicle information button; refer to page 4-35.
22."MAP" button (Navigation system equipped vehicles only); refer to the sepa-
rate Navigation (NAVI) system Owner's Manual.
HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND "ENTER" BUTTON
Choose an item on the display using the joystick and push the "ENTER" button for operation.
HOW TO USE "PREV" BUTTON
This has two functions.
Go back to the previous display (cancel).
If you touch "PREV" button during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen.
Finish setup.
If you touch this button after the setup is completed, the setup will start over, and the display will return to the climate control, Audio mode or Navigation screen (if so equipped).
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
If you want to return to the climate control mode screen, push the "AUTO" on button. To return to the audio mode, push the "Audio" button.
THE START-UP SCREEN (for models with navigation system)
When you turn the ignition key to ACC, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the screen. Read the warning and select the "I AGREE" key then push the "ENTER" button.
If you do not push the "ENTER" button, this system will not proceed to the next step display.
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate Navigation system Owner's Manual.
HOW TO USE THE "SET TING" BUTTON
To set Audio (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fader and Button Tone/Beep Response), Display (Brightness/Contrast, Display Off, Settings Display Duration and Audio & Climate Control Dual Display), Vehicle Electronic systems and Navigation system (if so equipped), push the "SETTING" button.
The following display will appear when the "SETTING" button is pushed.
For models with navigation system:
SIH0089
* Please refer to the separate Navigation system Owner's Manual.
4-5
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
For models without navigation system:
SIH0090
For rear view monitor equipped models: To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint and Color of the rear view monitor, push the "SETTING" button with the rear view monitor on, select the item key and adjust the level using the joystick.
"AUDIO" SETTINGS
The following display will appear after pushing the "SETTING" button, selecting the
"Audio" key with the joystick and pushing the "ENTER" button.
SIH0091
To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound (balance and fader), select the "Bass", "Treble", "Balance" or "Fader" key and adjust using the joystick. When the "Button Tone/Beep Response" indicator turns green, the beep will sound. (When you first receive the vehicle, the beep will be set to off.) To stop the beep, select the "Button
Tone/Beep Response" key using the joystick and push the "ENTER" button. The indicator of the "Button Tone/Beep Response" key will turn off.
To maintain the sound quality and speech intelligibility, select the "Noise Compensation" key and push the "ENTER" button. The indicator light of the "Noise Compensation" key will turn green.
To return to the SETTING screen, push the "PREV" button or "SETTING" button.
"DISPLAY" SETTINGS
The following display will appear when pushing the "SETTING" button, selecting "Display" key and pushing the "ENTER" button.
4-6
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
SIH0138
Brightness/Contrast (Map Background (for models with navigation system))
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, select the "Brightness/contrast" key and push the "ENTER" button. Then you can adjust the brightness to Darker or Brighter, and the contrast to Lower or Higher using the joystick.
The Map Background is for models with navigation system. Please refer to the separate navigation system Owner's Manual.
Display Off
To turn off the screen, push the "SETTING" button and select the "Display" key and "Display Off" key. The indicator of the "Display Off" will turn on to green. When any mode button is pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on for further operation. The screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the operation is finished on the map display (Navigation system only), the Audio & Climate Control Dual Display, SETTING or VEHICLE INFO. modes.
To turn on the screen, push the "SETTING" button and select the "Display" key and "Display Off" key, then set the screen to ON by pushing the "ENTER" button.
Settings Display Duration
You can set the confrontation continuance operation time for the audio, climate control and settings. When you finish setting the confrontation continuance operation time, the
display on the audio or air conditioner control will return to the previous display automatically.
To set the confrontation continuance operation time, select the current time setting with the joystick and push the "ENTER" button.
Audio & Climate Control Dual Display
Select the "Audio & Climate Control Dual Display" key and push the "ENTER" button. The audio and climate control setting condition will appear on the screen.
To return to the setting screen, push the "SETTING" button.
VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
The following display will appear when selecting the "Vehicle Electronic Systems" key with the joystick and pushing the "ENTER" button.
4-7
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
You can set the various electronic systems operating conditions.
SIH0139
SIH0140
SIH0141
To set an operating condition, select the applicable item using the joystick, and push the "ENTER" button.
The indicator light alternately turns on and off each time the "ENTER" button is pressed. Indicator light is illuminated. -- ON Indicator light is not illuminated. -- OFF
Lift steering column when exiting vehicle
The steering column automatically tilts up and
returns to the original position for ease of entry and exit.
Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle
The driver's seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position for ease of exit and entry.
Illuminate interior when unlocking vehicle
The interior light automatically turns on when the door is unlocked using the key fob or ignition key.
Interior lights off delay
The length of time required to unlock a door and remove the key from the ignition switch can be set. The length of time required to close the driver's door and turn off the interior light can also be set.
Select the "Interior Lights Off Delay" key,
4-8
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
then move the joystick to the left or right to adjust the timer.
Sensitivity of automatic headlights
Automatic light illumination can be set as desired.
Select the "Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights" key, then move the joystick to the left (lower) or right (higher).
Automatic headlights off delay
You can control how long it takes the automatic timer to turn off the headlights in the AUTO position after you turn the key to OFF and close all doors.
Select the "Automatic Headlights Off Delay" key, then move the joystick to the left or right to adjust the timer.
Keyless remote response -- horn/lights
When this key is set to Hazard indicators and horn, or Hazard indicators only, the following conditions will be set.
MODE
Lock
Unlock
Hazard indicators only
Hazard -- twice
No operation
Hazard indi- Hazard --
cators and
twice
horn
Horn -- once
Hazard -- once
Remote custom settings
If you unlock a door with the same key fob used when locking with the "Remote Custom Settings" key on, the audio settings you made last time remain the same. As many as four electronic ignition keys can be used with one vehicle.
Return all vehicle settings to default
When this key is turned on using the "ENTER" button, all settings made by VEHICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the original factory - set conditions.
LANGUAGE/UNIT (For models without navigation system)
The following display will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pushing the "ENTER" button.
4-9
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
SIH0148
Language: English or French Unit: US -- Mile, °F , MPG
Metric -- km, °C, /100 km You can select the language and unit using the joystick and "ENTER" button.
REAR VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)
When the selector lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows view to the rear of the vehicle.
4-10
WARNING
The rear view camera is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing and should not be used for lane changes. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up or changing lanes. Always back up slowly.
Objects viewed in the rear view monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the rear view monitor will appear visually opposite than when viewed in the rear view and outside mirrors.
Do not put anything on the rear view camera. The rear view camera is installed beside the license
plate light.
When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances are displayed on the monitor.
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
SIH0118
They are indicated as reference distances to objects. Displayed lines indicate distances 1.5 feet (red), 3 feet (yellow), 7 feet (green) and 10 feet (green) [0.5 m (red), 1 m (yellow), 2 m (green) and 3 m (green)] from the lower part of the monitor.
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the actual clearance.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
To adjust the quality of the screen, refer to HOW TO USE THE "SETTING" BUTTON in this section.
When it is difficult to see in the rearward direction due to shady conditions, press the "ENTER" button to make objects in the monitor brighter.
To change the brightness, press the "ENTER" button again, turn the key switch OFF or shift the reverse and wait for 10 seconds.
OPERATING TIPS
When the selector lever is shifted to R, objects on the monitor screen automatically change to those of the rear view monitor. However, the radio can be heard.
It may take some time until the rear view monitor is displayed after the selector lever has been shifted to R. Objects may be
distorted momentarily until the rear view monitor screen is displayed completely. When the selector lever is returned to a position other than R, it may take some time until the screen changes. Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed.
When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction.
When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.
The colors of objects on the rear view monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object.
4-11
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
When the contrast of objects is low at night, pushing the "ENTER" button may not change the brightness.
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night.
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the rear view monitor may not clearly display objects. Clean the camera.
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
Do not use body wax on the camera window. Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.
VENTILATORS
SIH0097
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.
: This symbol indicates that the vents are closed.
: This symbol indicates that the vents are open.
SIH0098 SIH0116
4-12
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
SIH0142
1. "AUTO" climate control ON button
2. Temperature control knob (driver only, or driver and passenger)
3. "OFF" button for climate control system
4. "AUTO PASS" ON button (passenger side)
5. Temperature control knob (passenger side)
6. " " Front defroster button
7. Intake air control "
" button
8. Air conditioner control "
"
("DRIVER" key), " " ("DUAL" key)
buttons
9. A/C control " " (" " fan speed up), " " (" " fan speed down)
10.A/C control " " ("PASS" key),
"
" ("ECON" key) buttons
4-13
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner (A/C).
WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause
4-14
the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Adjusting of the heater and air conditioner controls should not be done while driving, so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. When the "AUTO" button or "AUTO PASS" button is pushed, the "AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL" screen will appear.
SIH0147
You can individually set driver and front
passenger side temperature and air flow using
each temperature control knob and A/C con-
trol buttons "
" to "
".
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round. The system works automatically to maintain a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Push the "AUTO" or "AUTO PASS" button on. (AUTO will appear on the display.)
2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.
For normal operation, adjust the temperature control knob to about 75°F (24°C).
3. When selecting the "DUAL" key by pushing A/C control button " " or when
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
the passenger side temperature control knob is turned, the "DUAL" key indicator will turn on (green) and the temperature and air flow can be controlled individually from the driver and front passenger sides.
4. To turn off the climate control system, push the "OFF" button.
Economical operation (ECON)
Economical operation reduces some load to the engine to improve the fuel economy. It allows higher humidity than normal operation.
Pushing the "ECON" key using "A/C" control
button "
" changes operations as fol-
lows.
A/C ECON (A/C off) ECON
Push the AUTO button to turn on the automatic operation.
Heating (A/C off)
Use this mode when you need to heat only.
1. Push the "ECON" key using "A/C" control button " " twice (ECON indicator will turn off on the screen.).
2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.
The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly.
If the windows fog up, do not use the Heating mode.
3. To return to the air conditioner AUTO (A/C) mode, push the "AUTO" climate control on button. (AUTO will be displayed on the screen.)
Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the front defogger " " button
on. (The indicator light on the switch will illuminate.)
2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.
To quickly remove ice from the outside of
the windows, set the A/C fan speed at its
maximum by pushing the "A/C" control
button "
" and the A/C temperature
at the highest by using the temperature
control knob.
As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the " " button to return to AUTO mode.
When the front defogger " " button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23°F (-5°C) to defrost the windshield. The air recirculation mode " " will automatically be turned off.
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
4-15
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
compartment to improve defogging performance.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Push the "A/C" control button " " or
"
" to change the fan speed manually.
Push the "AUTO" button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Automatic intake air control
Push the intake air control button " " until the indicator goes off to make
the intake air controlled automatically (Fresh, FRE/REC and Recirculation).
Air recirculation
Push the intake air control button " " to recirculate interior air inside the
vehicle. The indicator light on the " " side will come on.
Fresh air
Push the button "
" to draw
outside air into the passenger compartment.
The indicator light on the
button will
come on.
The air recirculation " " cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode " ".
Air flow control
Pushing the "A/C" control button
"
" (Select the "
" key --
driver side) or " " (Select the
"
" key -- passenger side) selects
the air outlet to provide:
: Air flow from front center, side and rear ventilators.
: Air flow from front center, side and rear ventilators, and front and rear foot outlets.
: Air flow mainly from front and rear foot outlets.
: Air flow from defroster and front and rear foot outlets.
To turn system off
Push the OFF button.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The outside ambient temperature will be displayed.
The ambient temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind direction and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards.
4-16
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
REAR CONTROL BUTTON (if so equipped)
SIH0136
You can adjust the climate control system for
rear seat passenger using the following climate control button items in the rear seat.
"AUTO" button: automatic climate control mode on
" button: Fan speed control up (Max fan speed return to Low fan speed)
" " button: Air flow selecting (center console)
" " button: Temperature control up/down
OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for 20 to 150 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.
IHA017M
The sensor on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The climate control system is equipped with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. and it is also equipped with a deodorant filter to reduce odor. To make sure the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.
4-17
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
To replace the filter, contact your INFINITI dealer .
The filter should be replaced if air flow is extremely decreased or when windows fog up easily during operating heater or air conditioning system.
SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL
The climate control system in your INFINITI is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earth's ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your climate control system. See "Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" for climate control system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.
4-18
Your INFINITI dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly climate control system.
WARNING
The climate control system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with the proper equipment.
AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press the "AUDIO" on button to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
indicate any malfunction in your INFINITI radio system. Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.
IHA018M
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be
reduced by adjusting the treble control counterclockwise to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics. AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.
4-19
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION
When the satellite radio (if so equipped) is first installed or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Cassette player
To maintain good quality sound, INFINITI recommends using cassette tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length.
Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective
4-20
cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources.
Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player.
Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player.
If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality.
Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may collect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering
sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Compact Disc (CD) player
SIH0087
During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.
The player may skip while driving on rough roads.
The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.
Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the "COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO" logo on the disc or packaging.
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly.
The following CDs may not work properly: · Copy control compact discs (CCCD) · Recordable compact discs (CD-R) · Rewritable compact discs (CDRW)
Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction. · 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter · CDs that are not round · CDs with a paper label · CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges
4-21
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER
SIH0143
1. "AUDIO" on button
2. Volume control knob
3. "OFF" audio off button
4. "FMAM" FM1, FM2, AM band select button
5. "SAT" satellite channel select button
6. "CD" compact disc play button
7. "TAPE" tape play button
8. "PTYCAT" program type and category select button
9. Audio control buttons "
", "
"
10.Audio control buttons "
", "
"
11.Audio control buttons "
", "
"
12.JOYSTICK and "ENTER" push button
13."PREV" previous button
4-22
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Audio main operation
loaded, the radio will come on. While the (FM)
Head unit
system is on, pushing the "OFF" button turns the system off.
The radio has an FM diversity reception system, which employs two antennas printed on the rear window. This system automatically
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the volume.
switches to the antenna which is receiving Adjusting tone quality and speaker
less interference.
balance:
The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fader, refer to "How to use the SETTING button" earlier in this section.
reduced by the combined use of the Dolby B Audio display
(AM)
NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range
"FM AM" button:
automatically in both radio reception and tape and CD playback.
ONOFF/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then
When the "FM AM" button is pushed, the following display will appear on the screen, and play FM1/FM2 or AM.
When the radio text message `Push "ENTER" to Display Station Msg.' is shown at the
push the "AUDIO" on button while the system bottom of the audio display, radio station
is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) related new information will be updated and
which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is
displayed if the "ENTER" button is pushed and held.
SIH0102
SIH0103
4-23
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
" " -- Use the joystick
Up or down: Tuning or
Right or left (for less than 1.5 seconds): Seek or to the next available station.
Right or left (for more than 1.5 seconds): Scan or to the next available station.
"
" to "
" Memory stations
To program a station to memory (radio preset), turn the radio to the station you want to "memorize". Press down and hold the desired audio control button (1 - 6). A beep sound will be heard - if it is set. The station is now "memorized" to that audio control button.
"SAT" satellite radio button (if the unit is so equipped):
When the "SAT" button is pushed, the satellite radio SAT1 or SAT2 mode will appear on the screen and then play satellite radio. SAT 1
presets 1-6 and SAT 2 presets 1-6 are also available.
SIH0146
" " -- Use the joystick to select satellite radio channel Right or left: Select the desired satellite radio channel. Holding it depressed will continue the channel change. Up or down: Change the satellite radio category. (for example: ROCK, JAZZ, NEWS ...) "PTYCAT"-- In SAT mode, use to change the preset mode to category presets. To scroll
channels within a preset category, press the preset button.
"PTYCAT" program type and category select button:
When the "PTYCAT" button is pushed during FM mode, the PROGRAM TYPE screen will appear.
When the "PTYCAT" button is pushed during the satellite radio mode, the CATEGORY screen will appear. Pushing the "PTYCAT" button repeated will change the category (upside only).
4-24
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
"TAPE" button: If a tape is inserted into the tape player, when the "TAPE" button is pushed, the TAPE screen will appear and the tape will play.
SIH0144
The PTY name can be selected as follows and the radio goes into the PTY interruption standby mode and the PTY name or frequency is displayed.
" " -- Use the joystick to select PTY station or category:
Up or down: Select the PTY name or category.
Right or left: Seek the desired PTY station.
"PTY" station names
"
" to "
": memory PTY stations
To add PTY stations to memory, hold the desired audio control button (1 - 6) (until a beep sound is heard).
SIH0105
Audio control button
"
", "
"-- "FF" (fast forward),
"REW" (rewind) but-
ton
"
", "
"-- "APS FF" (automatic
program search
(APS) FF), "APS
4-25
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
REW" (APS REW) button
"
"-- "
" program button
"
"-- "
" Dolby B NR (Noise
Reduction) button
"CD" button:
When the "CD" button is pushed, the CD
CHANGER screen will appear and, if a CD is
inserted into the CD changer, the CD will play.
"
"
" 4-26
more than 1.5 seconds. " " fast forward button " " rewind button
"
"-- "PROGRAM" button
SIH0145
The play pattern repeatedly will change as follows:
", "
"-- "
" (CD disc ALL DISC REPEAT 1 DISC REPEAT 1
up),
TRACK REPEAT ALL DISC RANDOM 1
"
" (CD disc DISC RANDOM ALL DISC REPEAT
down) button
"
"-- "TITLE" button
", "
"-- Push the "
" or
"
" button for Pushing the "TITLE" button will change the
less 1.5 seconds. " " truck up,
display from CD changer to disc and track title when the CD is programmed with the text.
" " truck down FM-AM radio operation
button
"FM AM" band select:
", "
"-- Push the " " or " "button for
Pushing the "FM AM" band select button will
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
change the band FM1/FM2 or AM.
When "FM AM" band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when the "AUDIO" button is pushed to ON.
If another audio source is playing when the "FM AM" band select button is turned to ON, the other audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.
The FM stereo indicator STEREO will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE (Tuning):
To change the radio frequency or PTY name, move the joystick up (+) or down (-).
WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
SEEK/SCAN tuning: SEEK tuning
Move the joystick left or right for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting station or seek tuning begins for the PTY selected name.
SCAN tuning
Move the joystick left or right for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Moving the joystick again during this 5
second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
If the joystick is not moved within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.
Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2).
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
1. Tune to the desired station using the joystick (SEEK/SCAN or TUNE).
2. Push and hold the desired audio control button (1 - 6). A beep sound will be heard - if it is set.
3. The band indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner .
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
4-27
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations.
Satellite radio operation (if so equipped)
Satellite radio mode select:
Pushing the "SAT" button will change the satellite radio mode SAT1 or SAT2. No satellite radio reception is available and "NO SAT" will be displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless option satellite receiver and antenna were purchased and installed, and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active.
To establish a contract and service, contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-852-9696 or http://activate.xmradio.com or SIRIUS Satellite Radio at 1-800-539-7474 or http:www. siriusradio.com.
When "SAT" button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the channel last played.
4-28
The last station played will also come on when the "AUDIO" button is pushed to ON.
If another audio source is playing when the "SAT" button is turned to ON, the other audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio channel played will come on.
CHANNEL change:
To change the satellite radio channel, move the joystick right (+) or left (-), to the desired satellite radio channel.
To continuously change the channel quickly, move the joystick and hold it.
WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
CHANGE satellite radio category:
To change the satellite radio category (for example: ROCK, JAZZ, NEWS ...), when satellite radio mode appears on the screen, move the joystick up (+) or down (-).
"PTYCAT" mode:
To change the display mode from satellite radio mode to category mode, push the "PTYCAT" button. Current category mode will appear on the screen.
To select the category, move the joystick right or left, or push the "PTYCAT" button ("PTYCAT" button is only for seeking the category).
To select the channel within the category, move the joystick up (+) or down (-).
Display mode:
To display the information (for example, title, artist name) of the satellite channel,
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
push the "ENTER" button. For more information, move the joystick down. Move the joystick up to go back to information display. To change the display from information to channel and/or category mode, push the "PREV" button.
Station memory operations:
Twelve channels (six for SAT1, six for SAT2) can be set for the satellite radio.
1. Tune to the desired channel using the joystick (SEEK/SCAN or TUNE).
2. Push and hold the desired channel control button (1 to 6) until the sound resumes. (The satellite mutes when the select button is pushed.)
3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner .
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled, in that case, reset the desired channels.
Cassette tape player operation
SIH0133
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape deck in the glove box. The cassette tape will automatically be pulled into the player. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.
CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could cause player damage.
If the system is turned off by pushing the audio "OFF" button with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on.
"TAPE" button PLAY: When the "TAPE" button is pushed while
the CD is being played in the CD autochanger, the CD will automatically turn off and the tape will turn on.
If the "TAPE" button is pushed during either the FF , REW, APS FF or APS REW function, the cassette tape enters the normal play mode.
4-29
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind):
Push the " " (fast forward) button to fast
forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the
"
" (rewind) button. Either the FF or
REW symbol illuminates on the right side of
the display window.
To stop the FF or REW function, push the
"
" (fast forward) or "
" (rewind)
again, or the TAPE button.
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF , APS REW:
When the "
" (APS FF) button is
pushed while the tape is being played, the
next program on the tape will start to play
from the beginning. Push the " " (APS
FF) button several times to skip through
programs. The tape will advance the number
of times the button is pushed (up to nine
programs).
4-30
When the " " (APS REW) button is
pushed once, the program being played starts
over from the beginning. Push the
"
" (APS REW) button several times to
skip back several selections. The tape will go
back the number of times the button is
pushed.
Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right side of the display window while searching for the selection.
To stop the APS FF or APS REW function, push the TAPE button.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.
" " Program key:
Push the "
" button to change the tape
side while the tape is being played.
The cassette tape will automatically change directions to play the other side when the first side is completed.
If the "
" button is pushed during the
FF or REW function, the cassette tape enters
the normal play mode.
" " Dolby B NR (Noise Reduction) key:
Push the " " button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape noise. The indicator will come on.
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol " " are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Metal or chrome tape usage:
The cassette player will automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
TAPE EJECT: When this button is pushed with the tape loaded, the tape will be ejected. When the tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will turn off.
Compact disc (CD) changer operation
SIH0134
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON. "CD" button: When the "CD" button is pushed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the "CD" button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically turn off and the compact disc will start to play.
Disc insertion:
To insert a CD in the CD changer, select the loading slot by pushing the CD select button (1 to 6). After the slot door opens, insert the CD.
The active CD indicator will turn green. The other CD indicators will be red.
(" "," Disc up/down:
" key)
Use these buttons, to select another CD.
When the "
" button is pressed, playing
switches to the first track on the next disc. The
audio output is muted during this operation,
and playing begins automatically.
When the " " button is pressed, playing switches to the first track on the previous disc. The audio output is muted during this operation, and playing begins automatically.
(" "," " key) Track up/down:
Use these buttons to switch tracks on CDs.
When the " " button is pressed, playing switches to the beginning of the next track. The audio output is muted during this operation, and playing begins automatically.
When the " " button is pressed, playing switches to the beginning of the current track. The audio output is muted during this operation, and playing begins automatically.
If the "
" or "
" button is pressed
for over 1.5 seconds, the sound mutes to low
volume and plays at high speed in the forward
4-31
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
(or reverse) direction until the button is released.
( "PROGRAM" key) program:
Press the "
" button to change the
playing mode condition as follows.
ALL DISC 1 DISC 1 TRACK ALL DISC RANDOM 1 DISC RANDOM ALL DISC
CD EJECT :
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected.
To eject the discs selected by the CD select button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5 seconds.
To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.
If the compact disc comes out and is not
4-32
removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter compact discs)
CD CARE AND CLEANING
SIH0082
Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL
SIH0108
"MODE" select switch
Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD autochanger and Tape.
Volume control switches
Push the upper or lower side switch to increase or decrease the volume.
Tuning
Memory change (radio):
Push the tuning switch " " or " " for less than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch " " or " " for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station.
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF , APS REW (tape or CD changer):
Push the tuning switch " " or " " for less than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the current track or skip to the next track. Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. FF REW (tape or CD changer): Push the tuning switch " " or " " for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape or to change the playing disc up or down. To stop the FF or REW function, press the switch you pushed for more than 1.5 seconds again.
4-33
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
AUDIO REAR CONTROL SWITCH (if so equipped)
4-34
SIH0135
The audio system can be operated using the rear control switch.
"ONOFF" switch
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON position, push the "ONOFF" switch to turn the audio system ON or OFF .
"MODE" select switch
Push the "MODE" select switch to change the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD autochanger and tape. When the tape or CD autochanger is loaded, the mode changes to Tape or CD autochanger.
Tuning switch
Memory change (radio):
Push the tuning switch " " (rear) or " " (front) for less than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch " " or " "
for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station.
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF , APS REW (tape or CD changer):
Push the "
" switch
" or
"
for less 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning
of the present program or skip to the next
program. Push several times to skip back or
skip through programs.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.
FF REW (tape or CD changer):
Push the tuning switch " " or " " for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape or to change the playing disc up or down.
To stop the FF or REW function, press the
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
switch you pushed for more than 1.5 seconds again.
Volume control switch
Push the " " (front) side or " " (rear) side of the switch to adjust the volume. " " Front side: Volume increases " " Rear side: Volume decreases
ANTENNA Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your INFINITI, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the Multiport Fuel Injection system and other electronic parts.
WARNING
A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the
use of cellular telephones while driving.
If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.
CAUTION
Keep the antenna as far as possible away from the Engine Con-
4-35
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
trol Unit.
Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel Injection harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer .
Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
For details, consult your INFINITI dealer .
VEHICLE INFORMATION
The display screen shows vehicle condition information for your convenience.
The information shown on the screen should
be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
1. Push the "INFO." button on the control panel. The following display will appear.
SIH0109
2. Choose an item using the joystick and push the "ENTER" button.
3. After setting, push the "PREV" button to return to the previous screen.
TRIP COMPUTER INFORMATION
SIH0121
Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Average Speed will be displayed. To reset, use the joystick to highlight the "Reset" key and press the "ENTER" button immediately before driving the vehicle.
4-36
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
FUEL ECONOMY INFORMATION
along with the average for the previous Reset- MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
to-Reset period.
SIH0111
Average fuel economy and distance to empty will be displayed for reference.
To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use the joystick to highlight the "Reset" key and press the "ENTER" button.
If the "Fuel Economy Record" key is highlighted with the joystick and the "ENTER" button is pushed, the average fuel consumption history will be displayed in graph form
SIH0112
SIH0113
1. To set the maintenance information for the Engine Oil, Oil Filter or Tire Rotation, choose an item using the joystick and push the "ENTER" button. The following example shows how to set the engine oil change interval. Use the same steps to set the other maintenance information.
4-37
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
5. To return the display to MAINTENANCE INFO., push the "PREV" button.
Maintenance information display cannot be operated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place to see the information.
TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
SIH0114
2. Reset the driving distance to the new maintenance schedule.
3. Set the distance of the maintenance schedule. To determine the maintenance interval, refer to the separate "INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide".
4. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically when setting trip distance is reached, highlight the "Display Maintenance Notification" key with the joystick and push the "ENTER" button.
4-38
SIH0149
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a few driving trips, the pressures for all 4 tires will be displayed.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position.
In case of low tire pressure, the FLAT TIRE warning light will come on and/or a warning is displayed on the screen:
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
FLAT TIRE -- very low tire air pressure
Tire pressure rises and falls depend on heat by vehicle's traveling condition and ambient temperature.
WARNING
When the low tire pressure warning light is on and/or a WARNING is displayed on the screen, check all tire pressures. Please refer to the "6. In case of emergency" section for repairing.
If the system is malfunctioning, a WARNING for tire pressure will be indicated on the display. To confirm the details, push the "ENTER" button.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the pressure
will not be indicated (** psi will be indicated) and the low tire pressure warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for wheel replacement and/or system resetting.
VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEM (VACS)
The VACS (Voice-Activated Control System) provides a safe and convenient way of controlling vehicle systems such as the audio, climate control and navigation (if so equipped). The system is controlled by the PTT (Push to talk) button located on the steering wheel. Voice commands are picked up by a microphone. When giving a command, voice feedback will be heard through the speaker, and messages will be shown on the display. Voice feedback can be turned off.
Personal directories of nametags for radio station presets can be created, and spoken command help is provided.
FEATURES
The VACS provides the following features: Speaker-independent continuous natural
speech recognition engine Speaker adaptation or out-of-dialect
speakers for two different users Audible voice feedback (prompt, error,
confirmation, and speaker adaptation dialogue) Personal vocabulary (radio nametags, etc.) On-line help (general such as "Help", and more specific such as "Help Radio")
4-39
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the initialization of the system is carried out, which takes a few seconds. When complete, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the button is pressed before initialization is complete, the message center display will show "VOICE NOT READY".
Operating tips
To get the best results from the system, observe the following:
Close the window before operating the voice-activated control system (VACS). The voice-activated control system may not be able to recognize voice commands due to surrounding noises (travel noise and vibration). Be sure to operate the system when the vehicle interior is quiet. Set the fan speed to lower than level 3 when operating the PTT button.
4-40
After pressing the PTT button, always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
Giving voice commands
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Push an instant PTT (Push to talk) button on the steering wheel.
3. The beep will sound.
SIH0117
If the system is processing a command, an error beep will sound and a message such as "COMMAND CANCELED", will be displayed.
4. If the VACS is activated, "LISTENING" will be displayed on the screen.
5. Speak a command*.
*: Refer to the command list later in this section.
If you do not speak a command within 5 seconds, the beep will sound and "NO SPEECH DETECTED" will be displayed on the screen.
To cancel the command, press the PTT button again during feedback. The "COMMAND CANCELED" will be displayed on the screen.
6. If a command is activated, audio and visual feedback will be provided.
7. To skip the audio feedback for a com-
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
mand, press the PTT button during feedback.
PERSONAL VOCABULARY
The VACS provides 20 personal nametags that can be associated with radio stations. The maximum length for each nametag is 3.75 seconds.
The VACS provides two personal nametags that can be associated with speaker adaptation memory locations. The length for each nametag is 3.0 seconds.
HOW TO SAY NUMBERS
Numbers in voice commands must be given as follows. Either "zero" or "oh" can be used for "0". For information about specific commands, see the Voice command descriptions on the following page.
Radio stations
Radio frequencies should be spoken as follows:
"Select nine thirty AM", or "Select nine thirty" (930).
"Select one thousand" (1000). "Select ten forty" (1040). "Select thirteen hundred" (1300). "Select seventeen ten" (1710). "Select ninety seven point nine FM", or
"Select ninety seven point nine" (97.9).
"Tune one hundred point five" (100.5). "Tune one oh one point one FM" (101.1).
Temperatures (climate control)
In climate control commands, say temperatures as in the following examples.
"Temperature seventy four" (74). -- For Fahrenheit (°F)
"Temperature twenty one point five" (21.5). -- For Centigrade (°C)
"Temperature nineteen point zero", "Tem-
perature nineteen point oh", or "Temperature nineteen" (19.0). -- For °C
VOICE COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
In the command descriptions, optional words are shown in square brackets [ ]. Data items that you need to enter, such as phone numbers, are shown in italics. For information on entering numbers in commands, see "How to say numbers".
General commands
[VOICE] FEEDBACK ON/OFF Turns voice feedback successively on and off.
VOICE DELETE MEMORY A/B Deletes the trained voice stored in memory A or B.
VOICE [PLAY] DIRECTORY Lists the personal nametags stored with each memory location.
4-41
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
VOICE DELETE DIRECTORY Deletes the personal nametags stored with each memory location.
Dialog commands
YES/NO Confirms a command after the prompt "Please say YES or NO".
CANCEL Cancels a command after the prompt "Please say YES, NO or CANCEL".
CORRECT/CORRECTION To clear the last group of numbers entered when using the phone enter command.
STORE To store the phone number, say STORE after entering the phone number.
Help commands
HELP Gives spoken information about the voice activation system.
4-42
HELP DIRECTORY Gives spoken information about the directory voice commands.
HELP RADIO Gives spoken information about the radio voice commands.
HELP RADIO MEMORY Gives spoken information about the radio memory commands.
HELP TAPE/CASSETTE Gives spoken information about the cassette tape voice commands.
Example:
· HELP TAPE · HELP CASSETTE
HELP CD [CHANGER/DJ] Gives spoken information about the CD player voice commands. (if so equipped)
HELP AUDIO
Gives spoken information about the audio voice commands.
HELP CLIMATE [CONTROL] Gives spoken information about the climate control voice commands.
HELP DISPLAY Gives spoken information about the display commands.
HELP VOICE MEMORY Gives spoken information about the voice memory commands.
HELP NAVIGATION Gives spoken information about the navigation commands. (if so equipped)
Radio commands
RADIO ON/OFF Turns the radio system on or off.
RADIO PLAY Turns the sound system on. Selects the
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
radio, with the last waveband and station to be played.
RADIO SEEK/SEARCH [UP]/DOWN Seeks up or down the current band until the next station is found.
[RADIO] TUNE/SELECT frequency [AM/FM] RADIO frequency [AM/FM] Tunes to the frequency given in the command. The frequency ranges are: FM bands -- 87.9 to 107.9 MHz in steps of 0.2 MHz, and AM bands -- 530 to 1710 kHz in steps of 10 kHz.
Example:
· TUNE NINETY SEVEN POINT NINE (97.9)
· RADIO TUNE TEN FORTY AM
[RADIO] TUNE nametag, RADIO SELECT nametag
Selects the stored station with the nametag given in the command. A total of 20 radio nametags can be stored.
Example:
· TUNE COUNTRY (nametag) · RADIO SELECT WDET (nametag)
[RADIO] [TUNE/SELECT]
PRESET
memory
number,
AM/FM/FM1/FM2 PRESET memory
number AM/FM/FM1/FM2
Selects the stored station corresponding to
the preset number (1 to 6) given in the
command.
Example:
· TUNE PRESET ONE FM1 · RADIO SELECT PRESET THREE
AM
· PRESET ONE FM1
[RADIO] [SELECT] [BAND] AM/FM/FM1/ FM2
Turns to the band given in the command and selects the last station played.
Example:
· RADIO SELECT FM1 · SELECT BAND AM
RADIO STORE [NAME] Stores the currently selected station, with a nametag, in the voice system memory. When prompted, the chosen nametag must be spoken, and confirmed. A total of 20 nametags can be stored.
The sound system must be in radio mode before giving the Radio Store command.
RADIO DELETE nametag Deletes the station and nametag corresponding to the nametag given in the command from the voice system memory.
RADIO DELETE DIRECTORY Deletes all currently stored radio stations
4-43
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
and their nametags from the voice system memory.
RADIO [PLAY] DIRECTORY Gives a spoken list of station nametags and frequencies currently stored in the voice system memory.
Tape commands
TAPE/CASSETTE ON/OFF Starts or stops the cassette tape.
TAPE/CASSETTE PLAY Selects the cassette tape player. Any tape currently loaded will start to play.
[TAPE/CASSETTE] REVERSE/CHANGE SIDES Reverses the direction of the cassette tape being played. The other side of the tape is played from the current position of the tape.
Example:
· TAPE REVERSE
4-44
· CASSETTE CHANGE SIDES
[TAPE/CASSETTE] REWIND Selects the Rewind mode.
[TAPE/CASSETTE] FAST FORWARD Selects the Fast Forward mode.
TAPE/CASSETTE SEEK/SEARCH [UP]/ DOWN Seeks up or down the tape to find the next track.
[TAPE/CASSETTE] DOLBY ON/OFF Selects Dolby on or off.
CDDJ commands (if so equipped)
CD [CHANGER/DJ] ON/OFF Starts or stops the CD player.
CD [CHANGER/DJ] PLAY Selects the CD player, with settings corresponding to the last CD and track to be played.
[CD] [CHANGER/DJ] NEXT/PREVIOUS DISC/CD [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] DISC/CD UP/DOWN Selects disc up or down.
[CD] [CHANGER/DJ] NEXT/PREVIOUS TRACK [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] TRACK UP/DOWN Selects track up or down.
[CD] [CHANGER/DJ] PROGRAM Selects normal, 1 disc repeat, 1 track repeat, 1 disc random and all discs random in sequence.
Audio commands
AUDIO ON/OFF Turn the sound system on or off.
[AUDIO/RADIO/TAPE/CD (CHANGER/DJ)] [TONE] BASS UP/DOWN Increases or decreases the bass level by 1.
[AUDIO/RADIO/TAPE/CD (CHANGER/DJ)] [TONE] TREBLE UP/DOWN
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Increases or decreases the treble level by 1.
Automatic climate control commands
[CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL] AUTOMATIC [ON] Turns the climate control system on in automatic mode.
CLIMATE-[CONTROL]-[SELECT]/ [SELECT]-TEMPERATURE/CLIMATE[CONTROL]-[SELECT]-TEMPERATURE temperature [DEGREES] Set the climate control temperature to the value given in the command.
Example:
· CLIMATE 74 (seventy four) · SELECT TEMPERATURE 74
FAHRENHEIT · CLIMATE TEMPERATURE 74
[CLIMATE]/[CLIMATE CONTROL] TEMPERATURE UP/DOWN
Increases or decreases the temperature setting by 1 degree.
Example:
· CLIMATE TEMPERATURE UP · CLIMATE TEMPERATURE DOWN
CLIMATE [CONTROL] ON/OFF Turns the climate control system on or off.
[CLIMATE]/[CLIMATE CONTROL] DEFROST/DEFOG [ON]/OFF Turns the defrost or defog system on or off.
Example:
· CLIMATE CONTROL DEFOG · CLIMATE DEFROST OFF
CLIMATE [CONTROL] DUAL [ON]/OFF Turns dual mode or balance mode on or off.
Example:
· CLIMATE DUAL · CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
Display commands
[DISPLAY] [SHOW] PREVIOUS [SCREEN] Turns the display to the previous display.
Example:
· PREVIOUS · DISPLAY PREVIOUS · PREVIOUS SCREEN
Navigation commands (if so equipped)
Refer to the separate Navigation Owner's Manual.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-ofdialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number
4-45
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the VACS. The VACS is capable of storing two different speaker adaptation models in the memory location A/B.
If memory A is available, the VACS will use memory A to store the model. If memory A is in use and memory B is available, the VACS will use memory B to store the model. If both of the memory locations are in use, the VACS will ask user to select which memory location should be overwritten.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver's seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in Park.
4-46
3. Press and hold the PTT button for 3 seconds. The display shows ENTERING TRAINING.
4. Voice memory A or B is selected automatically. At this time, "TRAINING MODE VOICE A or B" is displayed.
5. When preparation is complete, press the PTT button.
6. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions.
7. When the training is finished, "RECORDING COMPLETE" will be displayed.
8. "PLEASE SAY YOUR NAME" will then be displayed. Follow the instructions and register your name.
9. When the registered name is confirmed, "TRAINING COMPLETE" will be displayed, thereby completing the SA mode.
10.The SA mode will stop if any of the following operations is carried out.
When the PTT button is pressed for more than 3 seconds in the SA mode
When the vehicle is driven during the SA mode
When the key is turned to OFF
Training phrase
During the SA mode, the VACS instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. (The timing of input phrases is indicated by the VACS.)
temperature eighteen point five degrees phone dial memory nineteen audio tone treble up tune seventeen hundred and ten phone enter three zero seven two nine radio select hundred and five point one FM climate control twenty two point oh de-
grees
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
telephone store zero five four four six map route guidance off CD changer tone bass down tune fourteen ten AM navigation cancel route guidance telephone dial memory ninety eight cassette Dolby on display show previous screen temperature thirty three point zero degrees CDDJ tone treble up navigation save present position map where am I select a hundred and seven point nine FM tape fast forward telephone enter star zero eight eight nine select thirteen hundred fifty AM
map store current location radio twelve eighty AM navigation show next intersection climate control defrost on tune eleven sixty AM enter pound nine oh zero one CDDJ play phone delete directory cassette change sides radio sixteen forty AM tune fifteen hundred seventy map voice mute off show bird view navigation go home map zoom in radio select preset one FM two
CD changer disc down 4-47
MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS
TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Displays "COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED" or the system fails to interpret the command correctly.
Displays "NO SPEECH DETECTED".
Displays "NAMETAG NOT UNIQUE".
The system consistently selects the wrong nametag.
Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see Command list in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is given after the tone while "LISTENING" is displayed.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on. NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
6. If a number of commands have been given in rapid succession resulting in the message "COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED" to be displayed, then allow the system to recover (approximately one minute) before trying the command again.
7. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker.
1. Ensure that the command is given after the tone while "LISTENING" is displayed. 2. Ensure that the command is given within a maximum of five seconds from the end of the tone. NOTE: Be sure you know what to say before pressing the Voice button.
1. This response will be received when storing a nametag if the nametag being given has already been stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory of Phone Directory command.
2. If this response is received and the nametag has not been used already, then it is too similar to an existing nametag or voice grammar and an alternative should be used.
1. Ensure that the nametag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory or Phone Directory command.
2. Delete one of the nametags being confused and replace it with a different nametag.
4-48
5 STARTING AND DRIVING
Precautions when starting and driving ....... 5-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............ 5-2 Three way catalyst ................................ 5-3 Low tire pressure warning system ........ 5-4 Avoiding collision and rollover............... 5-6 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving........ 5-6
Ignition switch ............................................. 5-7 Automatic transmission ......................... 5-7 Key positions.......................................... 5-8 Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ....... 5-8
Before starting the engine........................... 5-9 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-9 Driving the vehicle..................................... 5-10
Automatic transmission ....................... 5-10 Parking brake............................................. 5-16 Cruise control (ASCD) ............................... 5-17
Precautions on cruise control .............. 5-17 Cruise control operations..................... 5-18
Intelligent cruise control system (if so equipped)................................................... 5-19
Driving with intelligent cruise control system .................................................. 5-21 Intelligent cruise control switch .......... 5-25 Intelligent cruise control system display .................................................. 5-25 Operating intelligent cruise control system .................................................. 5-26 How to change the set vehicle speed ................................................... 5-29 How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead ........................................... 5-29 Approach warning ............................... 5-30 Automatic cancellation ........................ 5-31 Warning indicator ............................... 5-32 How to handle the sensor .................. 5-33
Brake assist (with preview function) (for Intelligent Cruise Control System equipped models)...................................................... 5-33
Brake assist .......................................... 5-33 Preview function................................... 5-34 Break-in schedule ...................................... 5-36 Increasing fuel economy ........................... 5-36 Parking/parking on hills............................. 5-37 Power steering........................................... 5-38 Active damper suspension (if so equipped)................................................... 5-38 Brake system ............................................. 5-39
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .............. 5-40 Vehicle dynamic control system (VDC) ........................................................ 5-41 Cold weather driving ................................. 5-43
Freeing a frozen door lock ................... 5-43 Anti-freeze ............................................ 5-43 Battery.................................................. 5-43 Draining of coolant water .................... 5-43 Tire equipment ..................................... 5-44 Special winter equipment..................... 5-45 Driving on snow or ice ........................ 5-45 Engine block heater (if so equipped)... 5-45
STARTING AND DRIVING
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they
could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected
5-2
immediately.
Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.
Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation switch to off and the fan control at 4 (high) to circulate the air. Be sure the rear seat armrest and tray are closed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the electrical wiring or other cable connections must be routed to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.)
The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE WAY CATALYST
The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three way catalyst ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
5-3
STARTING AND DRIVING
Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an INFINITI dealer .
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three way catalyst.
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
5-4
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pressure warning system, which displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the monitor screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.
The low tire pressure warning system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
Frequently check the tire pressure information display on the monitor screen and adjust pressure of each tire properly. (The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position.) See "Vehicle information" in the "4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems" section
for tire pressure monitor.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with an extremely low tire pressure (lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), the low tire pressure warning message will be displayed on the monitor screen. The low tire pressure warning light comes on, and the chime sounds for about 10 seconds.
For additional information regarding the above warning, see "Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "2. Instruments and controls" section.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on and/or low tire pressure warning is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers
or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of emergency" section for changing a flat tire.)
If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, you can continue driving after you have a flat tire. However, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced,
STARTING AND DRIVING
which could lead to an accident and personal injury. See "Wheels and tires" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section for more details and make sure to observe the cautions about runflat tires. Failure to do so may result in a serious accident.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated and the low tire pressure warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the low tire pressure warning system will not function properly.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
5-5
STARTING AND DRIVING
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the
5-6
vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the "Seat belts" section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/ DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.
INFINITI is committed to safe driving. You must not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix!
And that's true for drugs too (over the counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage and/or personal injury.
STARTING AND DRIVING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SIS0102
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in this LOCK position. The ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition,
make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park), the key cannot be moved toward LOCK.
When the key cannot be turned toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key:
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction.
3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key.
If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the select lever cannot be moved from P (Park). The selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.
5-7
STARTING AND DRIVING
To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.
Emergency release steering lock
When the battery is discharged, the steering lock may not be released. Proceed as follows to release the steering lock.
1. Remove the emergency key from the electronic ignition key. See "How to use the emergency key" in the "Pre-driving and adjustments" section.
2. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the emergency key deeply and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.
KEY POSITIONS
LOCK Normal parking position (0)
OFF (1)
5-8
The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel.
The ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
ACC (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running.
ON Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.
START (4)
This position activates the starter motor, starting the engine.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System will
not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key (hereafter "Electronic ignition key"). The engine may not start with the registered electronic ignition key under the following conditions:
SIP0281
1 If metal contacts the electronic ignition key.
2 If a device equipped with a transponder contacts the electronic ignition key.
If the engine fails to start using the registered
electronic ignition key (for example, when interference is caused by another electronic ignition key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered electronic ignition key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI recommends placing the registered electronic ignition key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other transponder equipped devices.
STARTING AND DRIVING
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear .
Maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically, for example each time you check engine oil.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Visually inspect tires for condition. Also check tire pressure.
Lock all doors.
Position seat and adjust head restraints.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
Check the operation of warning lights when the key is turned to the ON (3) position.
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P preferred.)
The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
5-9
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
5-10
4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.
In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Gate type shift with manual mode
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum power and smooth operation.
Shown on the following pages are the recom-
mended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
SIS0062
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the vehicle
After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before shifting the selector lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or manual shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever.
This automatic transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is ON.
The selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch.
1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and shift the selector lever into a driving gear.
2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward. Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicle is moving rearward. These could
5-11
STARTING AND DRIVING
cause you to lose control and have an accident. On slippery roads, do not downshift. This may cause a loss of control.
CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakes should be used for this purpose.
Shifting
so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
SIS0063
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Manual shift mode or any of the desired shift positions.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do
If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed from the ignition switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be moved to R (Reverse) from N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position. The selector lever can be moved to R (Reverse) from any of the D (Drive) positions within 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFF position. The selector lever can be moved from R (Reverse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or ACC position. If the key cannot be turned to LOCK, perform the following steps:
5-12
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.
2. Turn the key to ON.
3. Depress the foot brake pedal if the vehicle is in the N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position.
4. If necessary, move the selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is preferred) or move the selector lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle.
5. Turn the ignition key to LOCK to remove the key.
STARTING AND DRIVING
SIS0064
P (Park):
Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. For maximum safety, depress the brake pedal, then move the lever to the P (Park) position. The brake pedal must be depressed any time the selector lever is moved to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the lever to the P (Park) position.
SIS0065
R (Reverse):
Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped when selecting R (Reverse). The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral), or any drive position to R (Reverse).
Rear view monitor (if so equipped) When the selector lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a rear view of the vehicle.
5-13
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
The rear view camera is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing or lane changing procedures. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up or changing lanes.
Objects viewed in the rear view monitor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used. Objects will appear visually opposite than when viewed in the rear view and outside mirrors.
Do not put anything on the rear view camera. The rear view camera is installed beside the license plate light.
5-14
N (Neutral):
Neither forward or reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Manual shift mode
When the selector lever is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator first displays M4 (Fourth)
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M5 (Fifth):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
M4 (Fourth):
For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous.
M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on down hill grades.
M1 (First):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range. This reduces fuel economy.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When shifting up:
Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)
When shifting down:
Move the selector lever to the - (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)
The transmission will automatically shift the gears between the 1st and the selected range. (For example, if you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift up or down between the 1st and 3rd gears.)
Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode: Return the selector lever to the D position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.
In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.
Shift lock release
SIS0066
If the battery is discharged, the selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. To move the selector lever, push the shift lock release button. The selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. To push the shift lock release button, follow the procedure as illustrated. If the battery is discharged, the selector lever
5-15
STARTING AND DRIVING
may not be moved to the R (Reverse) position form N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position. To park the vehicle, push the shift lock release button and move the shift lever to P (Park) through R (Reverse).
If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have your INFINITI dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.
Accelerator downshift -- In D position --
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the
light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While the vehicle can be driven under these circumstances please note that the gears in the
5-16
automatic transmission will be locked in 4th gear .
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have your INFINITI dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.
PARKING BRAKE
SIS0067
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal. To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. Depress the parking brake pedal and the
parking brake will be released. 3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL (ASCD)
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The SET indicator light in the meter assembly will then blink to warn the driver.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control system will be canceled automatically.
If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your INFINITI dealer.
The SET indicator light may sometimes blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the steps below in the order indicated.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at set speed.
in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed.
on winding or hilly roads.
on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
in very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
5-17
STARTING AND DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
SIS0068
The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will come on. To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the 5-18
COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET indicator light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, follow any of these methods:
a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indicator light will go out.
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator light will go out.
c) Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position. The SET indicator light will go out.
d) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator lights will go out.
If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES/ACCEL or COAST/SET switch and reset at the cruising speed, the cruise control will disengage. Turn the main switch off once and then turn it on again.
The cruise control will automatically cancel if the vehicle slows down below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it.
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you according to that vehicle's speed, or at the set speed, if the road ahead is clear.
With ICC, the driver can maintain the same speed as other vehicles without the constant need to adjust the speed as you would with a normal cruise control system.
The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following another vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction. If the distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle ahead of you, the system will reduce your speed so that you follow the vehicle in front of you at the selected distance. The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to 25% of vehicle
braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.
WARNING
This system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the system in city traffic or congested areas.
This system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly
5-19
STARTING AND DRIVING
flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
The distance sensor will not detect under most conditions:
Stationary and slow moving vehicles
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
Motorcycles or scooters traveling offset in the travel lane
This system will not automatically brake the vehicle to a stop.
The system will cancel and a warning buzzer will sound if the speed falls below approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, the system will be disengaged below the 20 MPH (32
km/h) cut-off speed or over the maximum set speed.
The following items are controlled when the selector lever is in the D (Drive) position except in the manual shift mode.
When there are no vehicles ahead, the vehicle with this system maintains the speed set by the driver. The driver can set the speed between approximately 25 and 90 MPH (40 and 144 km/h).
When there is a vehicle ahead, the ICC system changes vehicle speed between approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) and the set speed to match the speed of the vehicle ahead and maintain the driver selected distance between vehicles.
When the vehicle ahead disappears, the vehicle with this system accelerates up to and maintains the set speed.
WARNING
As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the Intelligent Cruise Control system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
Although the brake operation is controlled by the system, the system does not automatically stop
5-20
the vehicle. If the vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h), the Intelligent Cruise Control system is automatically canceled and a warning buzzer sounds. (The brake control is also canceled.)
The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the Intelligent Cruise Control system under the following conditions:
-- On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
-- On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
-- During bad weather (rain,
STARTING AND DRIVING
fog, snow, etc.) (When the windshield wiper is operated at the low speed (LO), high speed (HI) positions or the fastest position of intermittent operation, the Intelligent Cruise Control system is automatically canceled.)
-- When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle.
-- When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor.
-- On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes).
-- On repeated uphill and downhill roads.
-- When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration.
If you are towing a trailer, the system may not detect a vehicle ahead. Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Control system.
In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system when it is not
5-21
STARTING AND DRIVING
recommended in this section.
DRIVING WITH INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
SIS0087
Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances. 5-22
The ICC system uses a sensor located on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles ahead. The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance if the sensor cannot detect the reflector from the vehicle ahead when:
the reflector is positioned high on the vehicle (trailer, etc.).
the reflector is covered with dirt, snow and road spray.
snow or road spray from other vehicles reduces the sensor's visibility.
dense exhaust or other smoke (black smoke) from other vehicles reduces the sensor's visibility.
if the reflector on the vehicle ahead is missing, damaged or covered.
if excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of your vehicle.
If your vehicle tows a trailer, etc.
The ICC system is designed to automatically detect when the sensor is dirty or obstructed. If dirt is detected on the sensor, the system is automatically canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. If so, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance. Clean the sensor regularly.
The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance and match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead; the system decelerates the vehicle as necessary. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 25% of the vehicles total braking power. Because of this, the ICC system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or vehicle speeds
change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the lane ahead or if a vehicle ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning buzzer and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action. Refer to "Approach warning" later in this section.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic jams.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the ICC to maintain the selected distance and to match the speed of a vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may be outside the detection zone due to its position in the lane. Motorcycles and scooters may not be detected in the lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is changing lanes ahead may be outside the detection zone until it is almost completely in
SIS0096
the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the buzzer. The driver may have to manually control the proper following distance.
5-23
STARTING AND DRIVING
When driving on some roads, the ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle ahead. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. These conditions could happen on winding roads, hilly roads, entering or exiting a curve, narrow roads or in road construction areas. Additionally, the detection of vehicles can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage). In such situations, the ICC system indi-
5-24
SIS0097
cator and buzzer may warn you unexpectedly. You will then have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
SIS0098
If you are driving on the freeway at a set speed and come upon a slower vehicle ahead, the ICC will attempt to match that vehicle's speed and maintain a selected following distance. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate the vehicle to match the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this happens, drive without the ICC system.
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
STARTING AND DRIVING
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.
4. CANCEL switch: Deactivates system without erasing set speed.
5. DISTANCE switch: Changes the following distance from; Maximum, Intermediate, Minimum.
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM DISPLAY
The display is located under the speedometer.
SIS0069
The system is operated by a master ON/OFF switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.
1. ON/OFF switch: Master switch to activate the system
2. COAST/SET switch: Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed incrementally.
3. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:
SIS0079
1. Intelligent Cruise Control system warning light (Orange)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system. 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.
5-25
STARTING AND DRIVING
3. Set distance indicator
Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.
4. Indicates your vehicle
5. ON/OFF switch indicator light (White)
Indicates that the ON/OFF switch is ON.
6. Set vehicle speed indicator
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed will be indicated by km/h.
When the key switch is turned ON, the display comes on as follows to check for a burned-out bulb, and it turns off when the engine is started.
SIS0080
OPERATING INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
5-26
SIS0081
To turn on the cruise control, push the ON/OFF switch on. The cruise indicator light, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on, and they are on a standby state for setting.
SIS0082
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (Vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The Intelligent Cruise Control system cannot be set under the following conditions even if the COAST/SET switch is pushed.
When traveling outside the 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) speed range
When the selector lever is not in the D (Drive) position including the manual shift mode
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is switched off
While the vehicle is being braked by the driver
When pressing the ACCEL/RES switch without there being a set speed in memory
When the windshield wipers are switched to High, Low or the fastest position of intermittent operation.
When the parking brake is applied.
System operation
WARNING
Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator or brake pedal, however, to properly accelerate or decel-
SIS0085
erate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change or when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden deceleration or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system
5-27
STARTING AND DRIVING
maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed.
Vehicle detected ahead: When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain a driver selected distance. The stoplights of the vehicle come on and the brake pedal depresses when braking is performed by the ICC system.
CAUTION
Never place your foot under the brake pedal. When the brake is operated by
5-28
the Intelligent Cruise Control system. You may get your foot caught in the pedal.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected:
When a vehicle is not longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system recontrols the distance to the vehicle.
To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal and steer the vehicle around the vehicle ahead. The set speed indicator will blink when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
SIS0084
Although your vehicle may be at the set vehicle speed based on ICC system control, depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.
STARTING AND DRIVING
HOW TO CHANGE THE SET VEHICLE SPEED
To cancel the preset speed, use any of these methods:
Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
Turn the ON/OFF switch off. Both the ON/OFF switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).
Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it.
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).
Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
HOW TO CHANGE THE SET DISTANCE TO THE VEHICLE AHEAD
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions. Each time the DISTANCE switch is pressed, the set distance will change to long, medium, short and back to long again in that sequence.
SIS0076
5-29
STARTING AND DRIVING
becomes "long". (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes long.)
APPROACH WARNING
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to large deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the buzzer and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
· The buzzer sounds.
· The vehicle ahead detection and set distance indicator blinks.
The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed.
5-30
SIS0086
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance. If the engine is stopped, the set distance
WARNING
Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Control system when traffic conditions cause the buzzer to sound frequently.
The warning buzzer may not sound in some
STARTING AND DRIVING
cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.
When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.
When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning buzzer will not sound when your vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects some reflectors which are fitted on vehicles in other lane or on the side of the road. This may
cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these reflectors when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor may also detect reflectors on narrow roads or in road construction zones. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle. Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by the vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).
SIS0101
AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION
A buzzer sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled.
When the vehicle speed is outside 20 to 90 MPH (32 to 144 km/h)
When the selector lever is shifted to a position other than D (Drive), including the manual shift mode
When the wiper is operated at low speed (LO), high speed (HI) or the fastest posi-
5-31
STARTING AND DRIVING
tion of intermittent operation When the parking brake is applied When the VDC is turned off When the VDC operates
WARNING INDICATOR Condition A
SIS0083
The buzzer sounds and the Intelligent Cruise Control system is canceled automatically in the conditions described below. Part of the
5-32
system display will come on or blink, making it impossible to set.
When the VDC is turned off
When the VDC operates
When a tire slips
When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the Intelligent Cruise Control ON/OFF Switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.
Condition B
SIS0090
When the sensor window is dirty, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the ICC system is automatically canceled. The buzzer sounds and the system warning light (Orange) will come on and the set distance indicators will blink.
Action to take
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the dirty parts with a soft cloth and then perform the settings again.
Condition C
SIS0099
When the ICC system is not operating properly, the buzzer sounds and the system warning light (Orange) will come on.
Action to take
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off and then perform the settings again. If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle
STARTING AND DRIVING
is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer.
HOW TO HANDLE THE SENSOR
SIS0087
The sensor for the ICC system is located below the front bumper. To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: Always keep the sensor clean.
Wipe dirty parts with a soft cloth carefully
so as not to damage them.
Do not impact the areas around the sensor. Do not touch or disassemble the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor installation part is deformed due to an accident, contact an INFINITI dealer.
Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.
BRAKE ASSIST (WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION) (for Intelligent Cruise Control System equipped models)
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated and generates a greater braking force
5-33
STARTING AND DRIVING
than that of a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
PREVIEW FUNCTION
When the Preview Function identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing the vehicle ahead in the same lane and the distance and relative speed from it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before the driver depresses the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play clearances.
5-34
This system will not operate when the vehicle is moving at approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) or less.
The pre-pressure function ceases when the following conditions are met:
a) When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
b) If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.
The sensor will not detect:
SIS0103
a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
c) Motorcycles or scooters traveling offset in the travel lane as illustrated
WARNING
The Preview Function is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. Although the brake operation is controlled by the system, it does not automatically decelerate the vehicle speed. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
As there is a performance limit to the Preview Function, never rely solely on this system. This sys-
tem does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. The Preview Function may not operate properly under the following conditions. The vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions and the Brake Assist will operate. -- When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor. -- When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the
STARTING AND DRIVING
vehicle. -- Winding or hilly roads may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect objects or vehicles in other lanes. -- Vehicle position in the lane may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect objects or vehicles in other lanes.
When the Preview Function operates, the brake pedal may move slightly and may make a small noise. This is not a system malfunction.
SIS0105
Warning light and display
When the Preview Function is not operating properly, the buzzer sounds and the system warning light (Orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off and then perform the settings again.
If the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the Preview Function is malfunctioning (the brake is operative). Al-
5-35
STARTING AND DRIVING
though the Vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer.
How to handle the sensor
The sensor for the Preview Function, that is common with Intelligent Cruise Control, is located below the front bumper.
To keep the Preview Function operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe dirty parts with a soft cloth carefully so as not to damage them.
Do not impact the areas around the sensor. Do not touch or disassemble the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor installation part is deformed due to an accident, contact an INFINITI dealer.
Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
5-36
near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.
Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear .
Avoid quick starts.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km).
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.
Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.
Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling.
Keep your engine tuned up.
Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule.
Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Improper tire pressure will increase wear and waste fuel.
Make sure the front wheels are properly
aligned. Improper alignment will cause premature tire wear and lower fuel economy.
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
STARTING AND DRIVING
ISD001
WARNING
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
Never leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended. Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
5-37
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
5-38
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 1
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 2
Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB: 3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position and remove the key.
POWER STEERING
The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.
ACTIVE DAMPER SUSPENSION (if so equipped)
The active damper suspension controls damping force and helps minimize the movement of the vehicle body. It helps stable driving when the vehicle moves up and down on large rolling roads or when the vehicle body leans
during cornering with a high centrifugal force.
The damping force of the shock absorbers can be adjusted to the level you desire. Set the switch to the position you desire while the ignition switch is ON.
Set the switch to the AUTO position for normal driving. The damping force will automatically adjust according to the road surface and driving conditions.
Set the switch to the SPORT position when you desire a firm feeling all the time.
In the event of an electrical system failure, a signal stored in the system's computer memory is automatically sent to the active damper suspension control unit and the actuators. The shock absorbers now function as they would on a vehicle not equipped with the active damper suspension function. Contact an INFINITI dealer for service.
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at
high speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake bedding
The parking brake shoes must be "bedded down" whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the Vehicle service manual and can be performed by your INFINITI dealer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will cause overheating of the brakes, wearing out the brake linings and pads faster and reduce gas mileage.
To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down
5-39
STARTING AND DRIVING
a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when
5-40
braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.
Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speeds will vary according to road conditions.
When the anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system is working properly. However, the ABS operation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.
Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clank noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal
and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS brake warning light in the instrument panel. The brake system will then behave normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
If the light comes on during the self-test, or while you are driving, you should take your vehicle to your INFINITI dealer for repair at your earliest convenience.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery
STARTING AND DRIVING
surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces, even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of yourself and others rests in the hands of the driver .
Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness.
When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
When installing a spare tire, make sure it is the proper size
and type as specified on the tire placard. See "Vehicle identification" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section for tire placard location.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEM (VDC)
When driving on slippery surfaces or suddenly avoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle might swerve or slip. With the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while driving.
When the vehicle dynamic control system is operating, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks.
When only the traction control system portion of the vehicle dynamic control
5-41
STARTING AND DRIVING
system is operating, the slip indicator will also blink.
If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive carefully. See "Slip indicator light", and "Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light" in the "Instruments and controls" section.
Indicator light
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
SLIP and
indicator lights come on
in the meter panel.
As long as these warning lights are on, the
traction control function is canceled.
The VDC system uses a Brake Limited Slip Differential (LSD) system to improve vehicle traction. The brake LSD system works when one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The brake LSD system brakes the spinning wheel which distributed the driving power to the other drive wheel. If
5-42
the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic control system turned off, all VDC and TCS functions will be turned off. The brake LSD system and ABS will still operate with the VDC system off. If the brake LSD system or the ABS is activated, the slip indicator light will blink and you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal.
While the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
The vehicle dynamic control system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
If engine related parts such as muffler are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light and slip indicator light may come on.
Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. The vehicle dynamic control system may not operate correctly.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs and bushings are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on.
When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly or the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on. Do not drive on
STARTING AND DRIVING
these types of roads.
If tires other than those recommended are used, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly or the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on.
The vehicle dynamic control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see "Engine cooling system" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see "Battery" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system by opening the drain plug located under the radiator. Refill before operating the vehicle. See "En-
5-43
STARTING AND DRIVING
gine cooling system" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section for changing engine coolant.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Please consult your INFINITI dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
5-44
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are deter-
mined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:
1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.
3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
4. Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
Wet ice (32°F , 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The
STARTING AND DRIVING
vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.
Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an
otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)
An engine block heater to assist extreme cold temperature starting is available through your INFINITI dealer.
5-45
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or twopronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
5-46
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Roadside assistance program ..................... 6-2 Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2
Low tire pressure warning system ........ 6-2 Run-flat tires (if so equipped) ............... 6-3 Changing a flat tire ............................... 6-4 Jump starting............................................. 6-9
Push starting............................................ 6-12 If your vehicle overheats.......................... 6-12 Towing your vehicle ................................. 6-13
Towing recommended by INFINITI ...... 6-14 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)................................................ 6-15
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year, unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance plan. In the event of a roadside emergency, Roadside Assistance Service is available to you. Please refer to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside assistance information booklet (Canada) for details. Both the Warranty Information Booklet and Roadside Assistance Calling Card in your Owner's Literature Portfolio provide the TollFree Number to call for assistance. Roadside Assistance is provided 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, for 4 years from the date sold to give emergency roadside help, in the event of mechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s) such as flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keys, mechanical breakdown, accident, etc.
FLAT TIRE
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pressure warning system, which displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the monitor screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with a very low tire pressure (lower than 26 psi, 180 kPa), the low tire pressure warning system will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light or a WARNING (FLAT TIRE) displayed on the screen. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). For more details, please refer to "Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "2. Instruments and controls" section, "Tire pressure information" in the "4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems" section and "Low tire pres-
sure warning system" in the "5. Starting and driving" section.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on or a WARNING is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the pressure of all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
6-2
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
soon as possible.
If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, you can continue driving after you have a flat tire. However, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. See "Wheels and tires" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section for more details and make sure to observe the cautions about runflat tires. Failure to do so may result in a serious accident.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated and the low tire pressure warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-
sible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)
Run-flat tires are those tires that can be used temporarily if they are punctured. After driving to a safe location, replace the punctured run-flat tire, following the instructions later in "Changing a flat tire". For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section. Also, see the tire safety information in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
WARNING
Although you can continue driving with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long distance at high speeds may damage the tires.
Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88 km/h) and do not drive more than 50 miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. A punctured tire may burst and cause a serious accident, resulting in personal injury.
Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid hard cornering or braking,
6-3
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
which may cause you to lose control of the vehicle. If a rear tire is punctured, replace it with a non-punctured tire, especially when driving on rainy snowy or icy roads.
CAUTION
Never install tire chains on a punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.
Avoid driving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than normal.
Do not enter an automated car wash with a punctured run-flat tire.
6-4
Have the punctured tire replaced by your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible, as the tire's performance capability is reduced.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P (Park).
Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated and the low
tire pressure warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
Blocking wheels
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.
SIE0063A
Getting the spare tire and tools
Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.
SIE0002
SIE0058
6-5
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Removing wheel cap
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the damaged tire
SIE0050A
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps. Doing so could result in personal injury.
SIE0006
WARNING
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack.
Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change.
Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
Never use blocks on or under the jack.
Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differential.
Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
6-6
Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point so that top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the center of both the jack head and the notch at the jack-up point as shown. Also fit the notched portion of the vehicle in the groove of the jack head as shown.
The jack should be used on level firm ground.
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel
SIE0001
nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire
clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.
6-7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Installing the spare tire
ICE006M
The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading "Wheels and tires" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section of this manual. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel 6-8
nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated (1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 ). Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm)
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the
After the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar .
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than
the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
SIE0059
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
7. Close the trunk.
WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
The T-type spare tire and small size spare tire are designed for emergency use. See "Wheels and tires" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section.
If needed Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe
6-9
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
Do not attempt to jump start a
frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
SIE0017
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
6-10
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other .
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated.
CAUTION
Always connect positive (+) to
positive (+) and negative (-) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc. -- not to the battery).
Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the normal manner.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.
6-11
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PUSH STARTING
CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be push started. This may cause transmission damage.
Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing. The three way catalyst may be damaged.
Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty &
6-12
Roadside assistance information booklet (Canada).
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
WARNING
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire.
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.
3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no
steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. 5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the drive belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands,
hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or to get caught in, the cooling fan or drive belt.
The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high.
7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest INFINITI dealer.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside assistance information booklet (Canada).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from your INFINITI dealer. Local service operators will generally be familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.
WARNING
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
6-13
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and power train are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
Always attach safety chains before towing.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI
INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to "Flat towing" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside assistance information booklet (Canada).
6-14
SIE0037
CAUTION
Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the rear wheels.
When towing rear wheel drive models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel
by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
SIE0038
SIE0060
6-15
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Do not spin your tires at high
speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
CAUTION
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow a vehicle for a long distance using only the tow hook.
The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle.
Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems.
Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.
6-16
7 APPEARANCE AND CARE
Cleaning exterior ........................................ 7-2 Washing ................................................ 7-2 Waxing .................................................. 7-2 Removing spots .................................... 7-3 Underbody............................................. 7-3 Glass ..................................................... 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels......................... 7-4 Chrome parts ........................................ 7-4
Cleaning interior ......................................... 7-4 Floor mats............................................. 7-4
Seat belts.............................................. 7-5 Rear sun shade (if so equipped) .......... 7-5 Corrosion protection .................................. 7-6 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion ...................................... 7-6 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion............................................... 7-6 To protect your vehicle from corrosion............................................... 7-6
APPEARANCE AND CARE
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain
after driving on coastal roads
when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface
when dust or mud builds up on the surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover .
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-
7-2
face when putting on or removing the body cover.
WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so that the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
WAXING
If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax specified for use over clear coats, such as
APPEARANCE AND CARE
Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax, because your INFINITI has been finished with the finest paint and hard clear coats. Your INFINITI dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.
If the surface does not polish easily, use a road tar remover and wax again.
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
or staining. Special cleaning products are available at your INFINITI dealer or automotive accessory stores.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing underbody and suspension corrosion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
SIA0010
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires. The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for
7-3
APPEARANCE AND CARE
glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the window, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defogger elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash regularly, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
7-4
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.
CAUTION
Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material.
Leather seats should be regularly coated with a leather wax like saddle soap. Never use car wax.
Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer .
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover .
FLOOR MATS
The use of genuine floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat positioning aid
SIA0004
This model includes front floor mat brackets to act as floor mat positioning aid. INFINITI floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The front floor mats have grommet holes in them. To install, simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floor pan contour . Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped) Screen
To clean, fully extend the rear sun shade screen and clean dust or dirt off using a vacuum cleaner from the inside of the com-
APPEARANCE AND CARE
partment. See "Rear sun shade" in the "2. Instruments and controls" section for rear sun shade operation.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the screen while cleaning.
Cover
Wipe the rear sun shade cover with a clean, dry cloth.
CAUTION
Never use benzine, thinner or any other neutral detergent as this may deform the cover.
7-5
APPEARANCE AND CARE
CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
7-6
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used.
Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
Wash your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
See your INFINITI dealer for assistance.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local INFINITI dealer.
APPEARANCE AND CARE
7-7
8 MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Maintenance requirement ............................ 8-2 General maintenance ................................... 8-2
Explanation of maintenance items ......... 8-3 Maintenance precautions............................. 8-5 Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-8 Engine cooling system ................................ 8-9
Checking engine coolant level................ 8-9 Changing engine coolant...................... 8-10 Engine oil................................................... 8-11 Checking engine oil level...................... 8-11 Changing engine oil.............................. 8-12 Changing engine oil filter..................... 8-13 Automatic transmission fluid .................... 8-14 Power steering fluid .................................. 8-14 Cooling fan fluid ........................................ 8-15 Brake fluid.................................................. 8-15 Window washer fluid................................. 8-16 Battery ....................................................... 8-16 Jump starting....................................... 8-18 Drive belts ................................................. 8-18 Spark plugs ............................................... 8-19 Replacing spark plugs.......................... 8-19
Air cleaner.................................................. 8-20 Windshield wiper blades............................ 8-20
Cleaning................................................ 8-20 Replacing.............................................. 8-21 Parking brake and brake pedal.................. 8-22 Checking parking brake........................ 8-22 Checking brake pedal ........................... 8-22 Brake booster ....................................... 8-23 Fuses.......................................................... 8-24 Engine compartment ............................ 8-24 Passenger compartment ...................... 8-25 Electronic key battery replacement ........... 8-25 Lights......................................................... 8-27 Headlights............................................. 8-28 Exterior and interior lights ................... 8-29 Wheels and tires........................................ 8-33 Tire pressure ........................................ 8-33 Tire labeling.......................................... 8-36 Types of tires ....................................... 8-38 Tire chains............................................ 8-40 Changing wheels and tires................... 8-41
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
Your new INFINITI has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your INFINITI's fine mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
Scheduled maintenance:
The maintenance items listed in this part are required to be serviced at regular intervals.
However, under severe driving conditions,
8-2
additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
General maintenance:
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.
These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your INFINITI dealer.
Where to go for service:
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced by an INFINITI dealer .
INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulle-
tins, service tips, and in-dealership information systems. They are completely qualified to work on INFINITI vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that your INFINITI dealer's service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle -- in a reliable and economic way.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have your INFINITI dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify your INFINITI dealer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, see "Maintenance precautions" later in this section.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following items with "*" is found later in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood, operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges and latches if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear .
Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
8-3
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (For example, buckles, anchors,
8-4
adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (For example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe condition require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Cooling fan fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold and the engine is turned off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. (Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.)
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. See "Precautions when starting and driving" in the "5. Starting and driving" section for exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold and the engine is turned off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see "Cleaning exterior" in the "7.
Appearance and care" section. Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For automatic transmission models,
8-5
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
move the selector lever to P (Park).
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.
If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery.
The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by an INFINITI dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.
CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn off the engine and wait until it cools down.
Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition key is on.
Never leave the engine or the automatic transmission related component harness disconnected while the ignition key is on.
Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, and coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regula-
8-6
tions for disposal of vehicle fluid.
This "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for most owners to perform. A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also available. See "Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, we recommend that it be done by your INFINITI dealer.
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
8-7
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
1: Fuse/fusible link holder 2: Engine oil filler cap 3: Brake fluid reservoir 4: Coolant reservoir 5: Battery 6: Windshield washer fluid reservoir 7: Power steering fluid reservoir 8: Radiator filler cap 9: Cooling fan fluid reservoir 10: Engine oil dipstick 11: Air cleaner
SID0261
8-8
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary.
CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system.
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Outside temperature
down to
°C °F
-35 -30
Antifreeze
50%
Demineralized water or
distilled water
50%
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. See "If your vehicle overheats" in the "6. In case of emergency" section.
The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
SID0229
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level.
If the cooling system requires coolant
8-9
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
frequently, have it checked by your INFINITI dealer.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
SID0230
SID0061A
Major cooling system repairs should be performed by your INFINITI dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.
WARNING
To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator .
Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.
When changing engine coolant, be sure the ignition switch is off.
1. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and remove radiator filler cap.
8-10
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts.
Waste coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.
2. Close the radiator drain plug securely after the coolant is drained.
3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of antifreeze solution and demineralized water/distilled water. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator filler cap.
4. Start the engine and warm it up until it reaches normal operating temperature. Then race the engine two or three times under no load. Watch the engine coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating.
5. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the
filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. 6. Check the drain plug for any sign of leakage.
ENGINE OIL CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SID0231
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
SID0260
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way, so the circle of the dipstick handle faces the vehicle front.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill. 8-11
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
The oil level on the dipstick may look different from the upper face and the lower face because of its inclination. Check oil level on the upper face which has a lower apparent oil level.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating with insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
SID0263
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
5. Remove the oil filler cap.
8-12
6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil. If oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in "Engine oil" for changing engine oil filter.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil is hot.
Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations. 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nm)
Do not use excessive force.
8. Refill the engine with recommended oil and install the cap securely.
See "Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section for drain and refill capacity.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
9. Start the engine.
Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required.
10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.
11.Dispose of waste oil properly.
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
SID0233
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
8-13
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil will be hot.
4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.
Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine.
5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage
8-14
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
8. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your INFINITI dealer for servicing.
CAUTION
Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF . Do not mix with other fluids.
Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and au-
tomatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment.
POWER STEERING FLUID
SID0234
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick at fluid temperature of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range on the dipstick at fluid temperature of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).
COOLING FAN FLUID
Recommended fluid is type Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
BRAKE FLUID
CAUTION
Do not overfill. Recommended fluid is type Genu-
ine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
SID0094
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range on the dipstick at fluid temperature of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range on the dipstick at fluid temperature of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).
CAUTION
Do not overfill.
SID0069A
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (U.S. FMVSS No. 116) fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently,
8-15
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
the system should be checked by your WINDOW WASHER FLUID
INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surfaces with water.
SID0267
Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze Fluid or equivalent.
8-16
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.
BATTERY
Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water.
Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (--) battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Do not operate the vehicle if the
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.
When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
IDI096-A
Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the battery cover if it is necessary). It should be between the UPPER LEVEL 1 and LOWER LEVEL 2 lines.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill.
8-17
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see "Jump starting" in the "6. In case of emergency" section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your INFINITI dealer.
DRIVE BELTS
SID0266
1. Remove the cell plugs A .
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL 1 line.
If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell, as illustrated. 3. Tighten cell plugs A .
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
1: Water pump 2: Alternator 3: Crankshaft pulley 4: Power steering fluid pump 5: Air conditioner compressor
SID0235
8-18
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your INFINITI dealer .
2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition in accordance with the maintenance schedule in a separate "INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide".
SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can cause damage to the spark plugs.
Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see your INFINITI dealer for servicing.
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
IDI072M
It is not necessary to replace the platinumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule in a separate "INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide", but do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
8-19
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
AIR CLEANER
SID0236
The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See separate "INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide" booklet for maintenance intervals. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off.
Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
8-20
REPLACING
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until a click sounds.
SID0249
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and the windshield wiper switch ON. Turn the ignition switch OFF when the wiper is in the fully up position. The wiper will stop as illustrated.
The wiper should be in the fully up position to avoid scratching the engine hood or wiper arm.
IDI018M
2. Pull the wiper arm. 3. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper
blade.
CAUTION
After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when the engine hood is opened. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure. Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.
8-21
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL CHECKING PARKING BRAKE
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
SID0237
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin.
IDI070MD
From the released position, depress the parking brake pedal slowly and firmly, and check the notches between the initial and final position of the pedal. If it is out of the range shown above, see your INFINITI dealer.
IDI071MD
With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above, see your INFINITI dealer.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.
8-22
WARNING
See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
The rear drum parking brakes (if so equipped) do not have audible wear indicators. Should you ever hear an unusually loud noise from the rear drum parking brakes, have them inspected as soon as possible by your INFINITI dealer.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see separate "INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide" booklet for maintenance intervals.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows:
1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the pedal height should not change.
4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster.
If the brakes do not operate properly, see your INFINITI dealer.
8-23
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
FUSES
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF .
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.
6. If a new fuse opens again, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your INFINITI dealer.
Fusible links
SID0239
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine parts. See your INFINITI dealer.
8-24
SID0238
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
ELECTRONIC KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF .
2. Open the fuse box cover.
3. Pinch the fuse perpendicularly with the fuse puller and pull it out.
SID0075
4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.
5. If a new fuse opens again, have the electrical system checked and repaired by your INFINITI dealer.
SIP0280
8-25
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Remove the emergency key and the screw
from the electronic key. 2. Remove the outer case. 3. Open the inner case using a suitable tool. 4. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent Make sure that the side faces the bottom of the case. 5. Close the inner case securely. 6. Assemble the outer case. 7. Press the key button two or three times to check its operation. See your INFINITI dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. If the battery is removed for any reason
8-26
other than replacement, perform step 5 above.
An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
The electronic key is water-proof; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
LIGHTS
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
1: Headlight, clearance, front turn signal and side marker light
2: Front personal light 3: Rear personal light 4: Side turn signal light 5: Step light 6: Trunk light 7: High-mounted stop light 8: License plate light 9: Rear combination light (Back-up, turn sig-
nal and tail/stop/side marker)
SID0240
8-27
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an INFINITI dealer. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" in the "2. Instruments and controls" section.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen)
8-28
bulb. If replacement is required, see your INFINITI dealer for servicing.
CAUTION
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
Hold the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Use the same number and wattage as originally installed:
Wattage 55
Bulb no. H1
Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture,
and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your INFINITI dealer.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Front turn signal light* Clearance light* Front side marker light* Side turn signal light* Rear combination light
back-up turn signal stop/tail/side marker License plate light Front personal light Spot light Console light Rear personal light Vanity mirror light Step light Trunk light High-mounted stop light
*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Wattage (W) 27 5 5 1
18 21 21/5 5
8 1.4 8 1.4 2.7 3.4 18
Bulb No. 1156 168 168 --
921 7440A 7443
168
-- -- -- -- 158 158 --
8-29
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F . When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
8-30
SID0116
SID0241
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
SID0242
8-31
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
8-32
SID0243
SID0244
SID0112 SID0245
SID0246
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
SID0194B
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of emergency" section.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure of the tires (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label under the "Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure" heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
Most tires naturally lose air over time.
Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be check when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD
8-33
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire malfunctions, or unfavorable handling characteristics
and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in a malfunction of other vehicle components.
Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.
Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high-speed capability tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire malfunction, loss of control and possible injury.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or
8-34
"Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Low tire pressure warning system:
This vehicle is equipped with a low tire pressure warning system, which displays the tire pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the monitor screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. For more details, refer to "Low tire pressure warning light" in the "2. Instruments and controls" section, "Tire pressure information" in the "4. Monitor, climate, audio and voiceactivated control systems" section, "Low tire pressure warning system" in the "starting and driving" section, and "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of emergency" section. If the tire pressure displayed on the monitor screen is lower than the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label, check the tire
pressure of all four wheels and adjust them to the COLD tire pressure as indicated above. The low tire pressure warning system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h).
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Tire and loading information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum number of
SID0264
occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.
8-35
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
2 Vehicle load limit: See loading information in the Technical and consumer information section.
3 Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.
4 Recommended cold tire inflation pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.
5 Tire size -- refer to "Tire labeling" later in this section.
6 and 7 Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped)
8-36
Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare. (Refer to the "Wheels and tires" section)
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall in case of recall.
SID0265
1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H) P: The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires have this information.) Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. Two-digit number (60): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width. R: The "R" stands for radial. Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. Two- or three-digit number (94): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
H: Speed Rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time. The
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
ratings range from 98 miles per hour (MPH) to 186 MPH. (You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.)
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number . 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark 2nd two-digit code: Tire size 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional) 4th four-digit code: Date of Manufacture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003.
3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
6 Term of "tubeless" or "tube type" Indicates that the tire requires an inner tube ("tube type") or not ("tubeless").
8-37
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
7 The word "radial" The word "radial" is shown, if the tire has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or Brand name Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.
Other tire-related terminology
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears while lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward racing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
CAUTION
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (Example: summer, all season, snow or run-flat) and construction. An INFINITI dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.
Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important
Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information booklet.
All season tires
INFINITI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
INFINITI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer
8-38
tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
Run-flat tires
If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, you can continue driving to a safe location even if they are punctured. Always use run-flat tires of the same size on all four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construction may reduce vehicle handling stability. If necessary, contact your INFINITI dealer for assistance.
Frequently check the tire pressure information display on the monitor screen and adjust pressure of each tire properly. (The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with
the actual order of the tire position.)
If the vehicle is being driven with a flat tire or very low tire pressure, the low tire pressure warning system will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light or a WARNING displayed on the monitor screen. If this occurs, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Check the tire pressure for all four wheels and adjust the pressure. if a tire is flat, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
WARNING
Although you can continue driving with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal
8-39
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
injury. Also, driving a long distance at high speeds may damage the tire. To drive safely:
· Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88 km/h) and do not drive more than 50 miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. A punctured tire may burst and cause a serious accident, resulting in personal injury.
· Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid hard cornering or braking, which may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
· If a rear tire is punctured, replace it with a nonpunctured tire, especially when driving on rainy, snowy
8-40
or icy roads.
Always have punctured run-flat tires replaced.
CAUTION
Never install tire chains on a punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.
Avoid driving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than normal.
Do not enter an automated car wash with a punctured run-flat tire.
Have the punctured tire replaced by your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible, as the tire's perfor-
mance capability is reduced.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the
tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
CAUTION
Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire or a punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
IDI069M
INFINITI recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See "Flat tire" in the "6. In case of emergency" section for tire replacing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 Nm)
8-41
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information"
(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
Tire wear and damage
IDI004
WARNING
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging, or objects caught in the tread.
8-42
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging, or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced.
The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When wear indicators are visible, the tire should be replaced.
Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact an INFINITI dealer .
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the original equipment tires. See "Specifications" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.
WARNING
The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted radial, runflat), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause premature tire wear, degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section of this manual for wheel offset dimensions.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure
will not be indicated and the low tire pressure warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have unknown structural damage and could fail without warning.
The use of retread tire is not recommended.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
8-43
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the driving wheels on the vehicle could lead to transmission damage.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of
8-44
the vehicle is washed.
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
INFINITI recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (T-type spare tire -- if so equipped)
When a spare tire is mounted (t-type or conventional), the low tire pressure warning system will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.
WARNING
The T-type spare tire should be used only for an emergency. It should be replaced by a standard tire at the first opportunity.
Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.
Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For Tire and Loading Information label location, see "Tire and Loading Information label" in the index of this manual.
With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the front axle and original tire used on the rear axle (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the rear (original) tires.
Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the original tire.
MAINTENANCE AND DO-IT -YOURSELF
Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.
Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.
Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than
the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it might get caught.
8-45
9 TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .............................................. 9-2
Fuel recommendation............................. 9-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .................................... 9-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number ... 9-7 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ...................... 9-7 Specifications .............................................. 9-8 Engine..................................................... 9-8 Wheels and tires .................................... 9-9 Dimensions and weights ........................ 9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ......................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification.................................. 9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate...................................................... 9-10 Vehicle identification number (Chassis number)................................................ 9-11
Engine serial number ........................... 9-11 F .M.V.S.S. certification label ............... 9-11 Emission control information label ...... 9-12 Tire and loading information label....... 9-12 Air conditioner specification label........ 9-12 Installing front license plate...................... 9-13 Vehicle loading information....................... 9-14 Terms ................................................... 9-14 Vehicle load capacity............................ 9-15 Loading tips.......................................... 9-16 Towing a trailer.......................................... 9-17 Maximum load limits............................ 9-17 Towing load/specification..................... 9-18 Towing safety ....................................... 9-18 Flat towing............................................ 9-21 Uniform tire quality grading ...................... 9-21 Emission control system warranty ............ 9-22 Reporting safety defects (US only) ........... 9-23
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ............................................ 9-23 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information ................................................ 9-24
In the event of a collision .................... 9-25
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fuel Engine oil (Drain and refill)*6
With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Reservoir Cooling fan fluid Power steering fluid (PSF) Brake fluid Automatic transmission fluid Differential gear oil Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricants
Windshield washer fluid
Capacity (Approximate)
US measure Imp measure Liter
21-1/8 gal
17-5/8 gal
80
5-7/8 qt
4-7/8 qt
5.6
5-1/4 qt
4-3/8 qt
5.0
10-3/8 qt
8-5/8 qt
9.8
7/8 qt
3/4 qt
0.8
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the "8. Maintenance and do-ityourself" section
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Recommended specifications
Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1 API Certification Mark*2, *3 API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3 ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III*2, *3
Genuine Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent*4 Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent*4 Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF*5 API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*8 NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) HFC-134a (R-134a) Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent Genuine Nissan Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze Fluid or equivalent.
*1: For additional information, see later in this section for fuel recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in this section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *3: For additional information, see later in this section for recommended SAE viscosity number. *4: For Canada, Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM, or equivalent ATF may also be used. *5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage
the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. *6: For additional information, see "Engine oil" in the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section for changing engine oil. *7: Available in mainland US through your INFINITI dealer. *8: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).
9-2
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91) may be temporarily used, but only under the following precautions:
Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration
CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect warranty coverage.
Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used since this will damage the three way catalyst.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.
The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygen-
9-3
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
ate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.)
If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.
If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling and hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
9-4
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.
Aftermarket fuel additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
In most parts of North America, you should use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI number in these high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeast-
ern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of Texas which is directly south of New Mexico.
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than stated above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have your dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at
an INFINITI dealer or other competent service facility.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. INFINITI recommends the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving
SIT0122
oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Only those engine oils with the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on the front of the container should be used. This
9-5
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH or SJ and Energy Conserving I & II categories.
If you cannot find engine oil with the API certification mark, use an API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving oil. An ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III oil can also be used.
INFINITI recommends mineral based oils. These oils must however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.
Oil additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is impor-
9-6
tant that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The chart of recommended SAE viscosity number shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine Nissan oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused
by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new INFINITI vehicle warranties.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes.
repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures,
driving in dusty conditions,
extensive idling,
towing a trailer,
stop and go "rush hour" traffic,
aggressive driving.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER
SIT0002
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
all temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in your INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your INFINITI dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.
Contact your INFINITI dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth's
9-7
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
in (mm)
Displacement
cu in (cm3)
Firing order*
Idle speed
rpm
Ignition timing (BTDC)
degree/rpm
CO percentage at idle speed [No air]
Standard
Spark plug
Hot type
Cold type
Camshaft operation
Alternator belt size
Width x Length
in (mm)
VK45DE Gasoline, 4-cycle 8-cylinder, V-slanted at 90° 3.661 x 3.256 (93.0 x 82.7) 274.2 (4,494) 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2*
See the emission control information label on the underside of the hood.
PLFR5A-11 PLFR4A-11 PLFR6A-11 Timing chain
0.841 x 76.38 (21.36 x 1,940)
The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
9-8
ITI003M
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
WHEELS AND TIRES
Luxury
Sport/ Premium Package
T-type Spare
Road wheel
Aluminum 17 x 7.5JJ
18 x 7.5JJ
--
Steel
--
--
16 x 4T
Offsetin (mm) 1.57 (40)
1.38 (35)
1.18 (30)
Tire size
P225/55R17 95V P225/55R17*
P245/45R18 96V
T145/90D16 106M
Tire pressure
230 kPa (33 PSI)
230 kPa (33 PSI)
420 kPa PSI)
(60
*: Run-flat tire Option
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length Overall width Overall height
Front tread
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
in (mm)
Rear tread
in (mm)
Wheelbase
in (mm)
Gross rating
vehicle
weight
lb (kg)
Gross axle weight rating
Front
lb (kg)
Rear
lb (kg)
*: P245/45R18 tire equipped model
Sedan 199.6 (5,070) 72.6 (1,845) 58.7 (1,490) 62.2 (1,580), 62.6 (1,590)* 61.4 (1,560), 61.8 (1,570)* 113.0 (2,870)
See the F.M.V.S.S. certification label on the driver's side lock pillar.
9-9
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
If you plan to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ .
9-10
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
ITI014M
The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (Chassis number)
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL
The number is stamped as shown.
SIT0109
SIT0116
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
SIT0117
The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F .M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
9-11
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as illustrated.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL
SIT0110
The emission control information label is attached as shown.
9-12
SIT0121A
SIT0112
The air conditioner specification label is attached as shown.
SIT0072A
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
SIT0111
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Use the following steps to mount the license plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.
License plate bracket
J-nut x 2
Screw x 2
Screw grommet x 2
1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket while aligning part A of the front bumper with part B of the rear surface of the license plate bracket.
2. To determine where to drill the hole, mark along both sides of the mounting hole by using a felt-tip pen.
3. Remove the license plate bracket and
9-13
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
connect the arcs to form ovals. Mark the point in the center of each oval. These are the pilot drilling locations.
4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 inch (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the fascia, or damage to the nut may occur.)
5. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.
6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 90° turn onto the part C .
7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia.
8. Install the license plate bracket with screws.
9. Install the license plate with bolts that are no longer than 0.55 inch (14 mm).
9-14
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside the vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in the vehicle is in a seat with their seat belt properly fastened.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F .M.V.S.S. label.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F .M.V.S.S. label.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the weight of total occupants weight subtracted from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo" on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity" on the Tire and Loading Information label.
SIT0123
To get "the combined weight of occupants and cargo", add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight to the value. Examples are shown in the illustration.
9-15
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
Steps for determining correct load limit
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. [1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.]
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. For safety, that weight must not exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F .M.V.S.S. certification label.
Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
Overloading not only could shorten the life of your vehicle and the tires, but also could lead
9-16
to hazardous vehicle handling and long braking distance. This may cause a premature tire malfunction, which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.
TOWING A TRAILER
SIT0035
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
An INFINITI Trailer Towing Guide (US only) is available from an authorized INFINITI dealer. This guide includes information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required for proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load/Specification Chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.
Towing loads greater than specified or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a
trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).
WARNING
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures are not covered by INFINITI warranties. An Infiniti Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing information on trailer towing ability and the special equipment required may be obtained from an INFINITI dealer.
Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following
9-17
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
Towing Load/Specification chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.
ITI002
Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight
The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed GVWR shown on the F .M. V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional 9-18
equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the F .M.V.S.S. certification label.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Unit: lb (kg)
MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD
1,000 (454)
MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD
110 (49)
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine INFINITI trailer hitch is available from your INFINITI dealer (U.S. only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
CAUTION
Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.
Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch.
To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment.
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
Regularly check that all hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Tire pressures
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard (located on the front face of the rear left wheel housing inside the vehicle).
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers' specifications.
Safety chains
Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to
permit turning corners.
Trailer lights
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at a point between the sensor and stop light switch or light switch.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.
Pre-towing tips
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving.
Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle's behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat
9-19
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
different than under normal driving conditions.
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the transmission selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.
9-20
When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating.
If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position.
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km).
Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the INFINITI Service and Manual Guide.
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.
Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.
To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive (automatic transmission).
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
When towing a trailer, change fluid in the transmission more frequently.
For additional information, see the "8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section earlier in this manual.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
For emergency towing procedures refer to "Towing Recommended by INFINITI" in the "6. In case of emergency" section of this manual.
Automatic transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating
9-21
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, and may vary significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9-22
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to your vehicle tires is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or speak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tire's resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY
Your INFINITI is covered by the following emission warranties.
For US: Emission Defects Warranty
Emissions Performance Warranty (See Warranty Information Booklet for details.)
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)) that comes with your INFINITI. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)), or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
INFINITI Division Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P .O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 90248-0191
Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
INFINITI Division Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii, Ltd. Consumer Affairs Department 2880 Kilihau Street Honolulu, Hawaii 96819
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying INFINITI.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or INFINITI.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236. You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
You may notify INFINITI by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-662-6200. In Hawaii call 1-808-836-0888.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)
Due to legal requirements in some states, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/ Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.
9-23
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, an INFINITI dealer can conduct it for you.
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions, and obey all traffic laws.
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle until the engine coolant temperature gauge
9-24
needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 6 seconds.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5 minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission
gear selector lever in the "P" or "N" position.
9. Turn the engine off.
10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time.
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.
OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at INFINITI dealer. Also available are genuine INFINITI Owner's Manuals,
and genuine INFINITI Service and Owner's Manuals for older INFINITI models.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later, contact:
Tweddle Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see an INFINITI dealer, or contact:
DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Owner's Manuals for the 2003
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
model year and prior, see an INFINITI dealer, or contact:
DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI Service Manual or Owner's Manual please contact your nearest INFINITI dealer. For the phone number and location of an INFINITI dealer in your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative will assist you.
Also available are genuine INFINITI Service and Owner's Manuals for older INFINITI models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important infor-
mation you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.
Insist on the use of Genuine Infiniti Collision Parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to Infiniti's original exacting specifications -- if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine Infiniti Collision Parts. Infiniti does not warrant non-Infiniti parts, nor does Infiniti's warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine Infiniti Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine Infiniti Parts may prevent or
9-25
TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION
limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease.
Infiniti designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.
It's your right!
9-26
10 INDEX
A
ABS (Anti-lock brake system) .................................... 5-40 Active damper suspention .......................................... 5-38 Active damper suspention mode select switch .......... 2-29 Aiming control, Headlights......................................... 2-24 Air bag system, Side and curtain (See supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system)....... 1-17 Air bag warning labels ............................................... 1-20 Air bag warning light........................................ 1-21, 2-13 Air cleaner housing filter............................................ 8-20 Air conditioner
Air conditioner service......................................... 4-18 Air conditioner specification label ....................... 9-12 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ......................................... 4-18, 9-7 Automatic climate control .................................... 4-13 In-cabin microfilter............................................... 4-17 Operation (See automatic climate control) .......... 4-13 Rear control button .............................................. 4-17 Alcohol, drugs and driving........................................... 5-6 Ambient temperature, Air conditioner......................... 4-16 Anchor point locations Top tether strap ................................................... 1-41 Antenna ....................................................................... 4-35
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).................................... 5-40 Anti-lock brake warning light ....................................... 2-9 Appearance care
Exterior appearance care........................................ 7-2 Interior appearance care......................................... 7-4 Ashtrays (See cigarette lighters and ashtrays)........... 2-31 Audible reminders....................................................... 2-16 Audio operation precautions....................................... 4-20 Audio rear control switch ........................................... 4-34 Audio system .............................................................. 4-18 Audio rear control switch .................................... 4-34 Steering wheel audio controls ............................. 4-33 Autochanger Compact Disc (CD).............................................. 4-31 Autolight system ......................................................... 2-22 Automatic Anti-glare inside mirror ....................................... 3-20 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-14 Automatic transmission position indicator light ...................................................................... 2-14 Climate control..................................................... 4-13 Drive positioner.................................................... 3-22 Driving with automatic transmission ........... 5-7, 5-10 Seat positioner, seat ............................................ 3-22 Transmission selector lever lock release ............ 5-15
Avoiding collision and rollover .................................... 5-6
B
Battery ......................................................................... 8-16 Battery saver system ............................................ 2-23
Battery replacement Intelligent Key system.......................................... 3-10 Remote keyless entry system............................... 3-10
Before starting the engine ............................................ 5-9 Belts (See drive belts) ................................................ 8-18 Brake
Anti-lock brake system (ABS).............................. 5-40 Brake assist (for Intelligent cruise control system)................................................................. 5-33 Brake booster ....................................................... 8-23 Brake fluid............................................................ 8-15 Brake pedal .......................................................... 8-22 Brake pedal check................................................ 8-22 Brake system........................................................ 5-39 Parking brake check................................... 5-16, 8-22 Parking brake operation....................................... 5-16 Warning light ....................................................... 2-10 Break-in schedule ....................................................... 5-36 Brightness control, Instrument panel ......................... 2-25
INDEX
Bulb check/instrument panel ........................................ 2-9 Bulb replacement ........................................................ 8-27
C
Cabin air filter............................................................. 4-17 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants............... 9-2 Car phone or CB radio............................................... 4-35 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ................... 2-35 Cargo net .................................................................... 2-35 Cassette player (See audio system) ........................... 4-29 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ........................ 5-3 CD care and cleaning................................................. 4-32 Child restraints ........................................................... 1-31
Installation on front passenger seat .................... 1-42 Installation on rear seat center or outboard positions............................................................... 1-34 Precautions on child restraints............................ 1-31 Top tether strap anchor point locations.............. 1-41 With top tether strap............................................ 1-40 Child safety ................................................................. 1-25 Child safety rear door lock........................................... 3-5 Chimes Audible reminders................................................ 2-16 Seat belt warning light and chime ...................... 2-13
Cigarette lighters and ashtrays................................... 2-31 Circuit breaker, Fusible link....................................... 8-24 Cleaning exterior and interior............................... 7-2, 7-4 Climate control, Automatic climate control................ 4-13 Climate controlled seats ............................................. 2-28 Clock ........................................................................... 2-30 Cold weather driving .................................................. 5-43 Command (See voice-activated control system)........ 4-41 Compact Disc (CD) changer operation ...................... 4-31 Compact spare tire ..................................................... 8-44 Compass ....................................................................... 2-6 Console box................................................................ 2-34 Control panel button functions..................................... 4-3 Controls
Audio rear control switch .................................... 4-34 Control panel button (display)............................... 4-3 Heater and air conditioner controls (See automatic climate control) .................................................... 4-13 Steering wheel audio controls ............................. 4-33 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ...... 9-2 Changing engine coolant..................................... 8-10 Checking engine coolant level............................... 8-9 Cooling fan fluid......................................................... 8-15 Corrosion protection..................................................... 7-6
Cruise control ............................................................. 5-13 Cruise control, Intelligent cruise control system ....... 5-19 Cup holders ................................................................ 2-32 Curtain side-impact air bag system (See supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system)........................................................................ 1-17 CVT, Transmission selector lever lock release ......... 5-15
D
Daytime running light system .................................... 2-24 Defroster switch, Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch........................................................... 2-20 Dimensions and weights .............................................. 9-9 Display controls (See control panel button functions) ...................................................................... 4-3 Door open warning light ............................................ 2-11 Drive belts................................................................... 8-18 Drive positioner, Automatic........................................ 3-22 Driving
Cold weather driving............................................ 5-43 Driving with automatic transmission ........... 5-7, 5-10 Precautions when starting and driving.................. 5-2
10-2
INDEX
E
Economy, Fuel ............................................................ 5-36 Electric sunroof ........................................................... 2-38 Emission control information label ............................ 9-12 Emission control system warranty.............................. 9-22 Engine
Before starting the engine...................................... 5-9 Break-in schedule ................................................ 5-36 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants........ 9-2 Changing engine coolant..................................... 8-10 Changing engine oil ............................................ 8-12 Changing engine oil filter.................................... 8-13 Checking engine coolant level............................... 8-9 Checking engine oil level .................................... 8-11 Coolant temperature gauge.................................... 2-5 Engine block heater ............................................. 5-45 Engine compartment check locations .................... 8-8 Engine cooling system........................................... 8-9 Engine oil............................................................. 8-11 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.............. 9-5 Engine oil viscosity................................................ 9-6 Engine serial number........................................... 9-11 Engine specifications ............................................. 9-8 If your vehicle overheats...................................... 6-12
Starting the engine................................................. 5-9 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................................. 5-2
F
F .M.V.S.S. certification label ..................................... 9-11 Filter
Air cleaner housing filter ..................................... 8-20 Changing engine oil filter.................................... 8-13 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)............ 2-26 Flat tire.......................................................................... 6-2 Flat tire, Low tire pressure warning system................. 5-4 Floor mat cleaning................................................ 7-4, 7-5 Fluid Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-14 Brake fluid............................................................ 8-15 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants........ 9-2 Cooling fan fluid.................................................. 8-15 Engine coolant ....................................................... 8-9 Engine oil............................................................. 8-11 Power steering fluid............................................. 8-14 Window washer fluid ........................................... 8-16 FM-AM radio with cassette player and Compact Disc (CD) changer .............................................................. 4-22 Front power seat adjustment ........................................ 1-2
Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants........ 9-2 filler cap ............................................................... 3-17 filler lid................................................................. 3-17 Fuel economy....................................................... 5-36 Fuel economy information (display).................... 4-37 Fuel octane rating .................................................. 9-3 Fuel recommendation............................................. 9-3 Gauge ..................................................................... 2-5
Fuses........................................................................... 8-24 Fusible links ............................................................... 8-24
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal Transceiver.................................................................. 2-43 Gas cap ....................................................................... 3-17 Gauge ............................................................................ 2-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5 Fuel gauge ............................................................. 2-5 Odometer................................................................ 2-4 Speedometer........................................................... 2-4 Tachometer............................................................. 2-4 General maintenance..................................................... 8-2 Glove box.................................................................... 2-33
10-3
INDEX
Glove box lock............................................................ 2-33
H
Hazard warning flasher switch.................................... 2-26 Head restraints .............................................................. 1-5 Headlights
Aiming control ..................................................... 2-24 Bulb replacement ................................................. 8-28 Headlight switch................................................... 2-22 Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-21 Heated seats................................................................ 2-27 Heater Automatic climate control .................................... 4-13 Engine coolant heater .......................................... 5-45 HomeLink Universal Transceiver ............................. 2-43 Hood release ............................................................... 3-11 Horn ............................................................................ 2-26 How to stop alarm...................................................... 2-18
I
Ignition switch .............................................................. 5-7 Automatic transmission models................... 5-7, 5-10 Key positions ......................................................... 5-8
Immobilizer system..................................................... 2-18 In-cabin microfilter ..................................................... 4-17 Indicator lights ............................................................ 2-14 Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System
Engine start ............................................................ 5-8 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.............................. 3-20 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .............................. 9-23 Instrument brightness control..................................... 2-25 Instrument panel ........................................................... 2-2 Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system ...................... 5-19 Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system, Brake assist ........................................................................... 5-33 Interior light replacement............................................ 8-29 Interior lights .............................................................. 2-41 Interior trunk lid release ............................................. 3-16 ISOFIX child restraint ................................................. 1-39
J
Jump starting ................................................................ 6-9
K
Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry system) ........ 3-5
Keys (Electronic ignition key)....................................... 3-2
L
Label, Air conditioner specification label................... 9-12 Label, Emission control information label ................. 9-12 Label, F .M.V.S.S. certification label .......................... 9-11 Labels
Air bag warning labels......................................... 1-20 Engine serial number........................................... 9-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) .................... 9-10 LATCH system............................................................ 1-39 License plate, Installing front license plate................ 9-13 Light Air bag warning light........................................... 1-21 Bulb replacement ................................................. 8-27 Headlight switch................................................... 2-22 Headlights Bulb replacement ............................... 8-28 Interior lights........................................................ 2-41 Personal lights ..................................................... 2-42 Replacement ......................................................... 8-27 Trunk light ........................................................... 2-43 Vanity mirror lights.............................................. 2-43 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ..................................................... 2-9, 2-14
10-4
INDEX
Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-21 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement........... 8-29 Loading information (See vehicle loading information)................................................................. 9-14 Lock
Door locks.............................................................. 3-3 Glove box lock..................................................... 2-33 Power door lock..................................................... 3-3 Trunk lid lock opener lever ................................. 3-12 Lockout protection ........................................................ 3-5 Low fuel warning light................................................ 2-11 Low tire pressure warning light ................................. 2-11 Low tire pressure warning system ............................... 6-2
M
Maintenance Battery .................................................................. 8-16 General maintenance.............................................. 8-2 Inside the vehicle................................................... 8-3 Maintenance information (display) ...................... 4-37 Maintenance precautions ....................................... 8-5 Maintenance requirement....................................... 8-2 Outside the vehicle ................................................ 8-3 Seat belt maintenance.......................................... 1-31
Under the hood and vehicle .................................. 8-4 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) .............................. 2-15 Meters and gauges ....................................................... 2-3 Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness control ... 2-25 Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror....................... 3-20 Outside mirror control ......................................... 3-21 Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-21
N
Net, Cargo net ............................................................ 2-35 New vehicle break-in .................................................. 5-36 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System ........................... 2-17
O
Odometer....................................................................... 2-4 Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants........ 9-2 Changing engine oil ............................................ 8-12 Checking engine oil level .................................... 8-11 Engine oil............................................................. 8-11 Engine oil viscosity................................................ 9-6 Outside mirror control ................................................ 3-21
Outside mirrors........................................................... 3-21 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ............................ 6-12 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information... 9-24
P
Parking Brake check.......................................................... 8-22 Parking brake check............................................. 5-16 Parking brake operation....................................... 5-16 Parking on hills ................................................... 5-16
Parking/parking on hills ............................................. 5-37 Personal lights ............................................................ 2-42 Phone, Car phone or CB radio .................................. 4-35 Power
Front seat adjustment ............................................ 1-2 Power door lock..................................................... 3-3 Power outlet ......................................................... 2-30 Power steering fluid............................................. 8-14 Power steering system......................................... 5-38 Power windows .................................................... 2-35 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................................... 1-19 Precautions Audio operation.................................................... 4-20 Child restraints..................................................... 1-31
10-5
INDEX
Cruise control ...................................................... 5-17 Maintenance ........................................................... 8-5 Seat belt usage .................................................... 1-22 Supplemental restraint system............................... 1-7 When starting and driving ..................................... 5-2 Push starting............................................................... 6-12
R
Radio ........................................................................... 4-18 Audio rear control switch .................................... 4-34 Car phone or CB radio........................................ 4-35 FM-AM radio with cassette player and Compact Disc (CD) changer ............................................... 4-22 Steering wheel audio controls ............................. 4-33
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) .................................................................... 9-23 Rear audio control switch........................................... 4-34 Rear control button, Air conditioner........................... 4-17 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ................ 3-5 Rear power point ........................................................ 2-30 Rear seat adjustment .................................................... 1-4 Rear sun shade........................................................... 2-39 Rear sun shade cleaning .............................................. 7-5 Rear view monitor....................................................... 4-10
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch ..... 2-20 Registering your vehicle in another country .............. 9-10 Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 3-5 Reporting safety defects (US only)............................. 9-23 Roadside assistance program....................................... 6-2 Rollover ......................................................................... 5-6 Run-flat tires ................................................................. 6-3
S
Safety Child seat belts.................................................... 1-25 Reporting safety defects (US only)...................... 9-23 Towing safety....................................................... 9-18
Satellite radio operation.............................................. 4-28 Seat
Belt warning light................................................. 1-22 Belt warning light and chime .............................. 2-13 Seat adjustment Front power seat adjustment ................................. 1-2 Rear seat adjustment.............................................. 1-4 Seat belt(s) Child safety .......................................................... 1-25 Infants and small children ................................... 1-26 Injured persons .................................................... 1-27
Larger children..................................................... 1-26 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................ 1-19 Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-22 Pregnant women .................................................. 1-27 Seat belt cleaning .................................................. 7-5 Seat belt extenders............................................... 1-31 Seat belt maintenance.......................................... 1-31 Seat belts ............................................................. 1-22 Shoulder belt height adjustment.......................... 1-30 Three-point type................................................... 1-27 Seat(s) Climate controlled seats ...................................... 2-28 Driver-side memory ............................................. 3-22 Heated seats......................................................... 2-27 Seats....................................................................... 1-2 Security system, Vehicle security system .................. 2-17 Security systems (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ................................................................. 2-18 Security systems (See vehicle security system) ........ 2-17 Servicing air conditioner (See automatic climate control)........................................................................ 4-13 Servicing climate control ............................................ 4-18 Shift lock release ........................................................ 5-15 Shift lock release, CVT............................................... 5-15
10-6
INDEX
Shifting Automatic transmission................................ 5-7, 5-10
Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ...... 1-30 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system) ................... 1-17 Spark plugs................................................................. 8-19 Speedometer ................................................................. 2-4 Starting
Before starting the engine...................................... 5-9 Jump starting ......................................................... 6-9 Precautions when starting and driving.................. 5-2 Push starting........................................................ 6-12 Starting the engine................................................. 5-9 Steering Power steering fluid............................................. 8-14 Power steering system......................................... 5-38 Steering wheel switch for audio controls............ 4-33 Tilting telescopic steering column ...................... 3-19 Storage ........................................................................ 2-32 Sun shade ................................................................... 2-39 Rear sun shade .................................................... 2-39 Rear sun shade cleaning ....................................... 7-5 Sun visors................................................................... 3-20 Sunroof ....................................................................... 2-37 Electric sunroof .................................................... 2-38
Supplemental air bag warning labels......................... 1-20 Supplemental air bag warning light ................. 1-21, 2-13 Supplemental restraint system...................................... 1-7
Precautions on supplemental restraint system...... 1-7 Supplemental side and curtain side-impact air bag system ......................................................................... 1-17 Suspension
Active damper suspension................................... 5-38 Active damper suspension mode select switch... 2-29 Switch Active damper suspension mode select switch... 2-29 Audio control steering wheel switch ................... 4-33 Audio rear control switch .................................... 4-34 Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-26 Headlight aiming control ..................................... 2-24 Headlight switch................................................... 2-22 Ignition switch........................................................ 5-7 Ignition switch automatic transmission models.......................................................... 5-7, 5-10 Power door lock switch ......................................... 3-5 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch ................................................................... 2-20 Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-25
T
Tachometer ................................................................... 2-4 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ............................................................................ 2-5 Theft (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ............................................................................. 2-18 Three way catalyst ........................................................ 5-3 Tilting telescopic steering column ............................. 3-19 Tire
Flat tire................................................................... 6-2 Low tire pressure warning system......................... 6-2 Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light .......... 2-11 Run-flat tires .......................................................... 6-3 Tire placard .......................................................... 9-12 Tire pressure information (display) ..................... 4-38 Uniform tire quality grading ................................ 9-21 Tires Spare tire.............................................................. 8-44 Tire chains ........................................................... 8-40 Tire pressure ........................................................ 8-33 Tire rotation.......................................................... 8-41 Types of tires....................................................... 8-38 Wheel/tire size........................................................ 9-9 Wheels and tires .................................................. 8-33
10-7
INDEX
Top tether strap child restraints................................. 1-40 T owing
Tow truck towing ................................................. 6-13 Towing a trailer.................................................... 9-17 Towing load/specification chart........................... 9-17 Towing safety....................................................... 9-18 Trailer towing.............................................................. 9-17 Transceiver, HomeLink Universal Transceiver ........ 2-43 T ransmission Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-14 Driving with automatic transmission ........... 5-7, 5-10 Transmission selector lever lock release ............ 5-15 Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system) ........... 3-5 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ........................................................................ 9-10 Trip computer information (display) .......................... 4-36 Trouble-shooting guide (for voice-activated control system)........................................................................ 4-48 T runk Auto open and close............................................ 3-14 Interior trunk lid release ...................................... 3-16 Lid lock opener lever........................................... 3-12 Light ..................................................................... 2-43 Turn signal switch...................................................... 2-25
U
Underbody cleaning...................................................... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading ....................................... 9-21
V
Vanity mirror lights..................................................... 2-43 Vehicle
Dimensions and weights........................................ 9-9 Identification number (VIN).................................. 9-10 Load capacity ....................................................... 9-15 Loading information............................................. 9-14 Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)....................... 6-15 Security system.................................................... 2-17 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) switch .............. 2-30 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system .............. 5-41 Vehicle electronic systems..................................... 4-7 Vehicle information (display)............................... 4-36 Ventilators ................................................................... 4-12 Voice command (See voice-activated control Voice-activated control system (VACS) ..................... 4-39
W
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels..................... 1-20 Warning light
Air bag warning light................................. 1-21, 2-13 Anti-lock brake warning light ................................ 2-9 Brake warning light.............................................. 2-10 Door open warning light...................................... 2-11 Low fuel warning light......................................... 2-11 Low tire pressure warning light........................... 2-11 Preview function warning light ............................ 2-11 Seat belt warning light and chime ...................... 2-13 Warning lights .............................................................. 2-9 Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch.................... 2-26 Warning, Low tire pressure warning system........ 5-4, 6-2 Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ...................................................................... 2-9 Warranty, Emission control system warranty............. 9-22 Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch .......................................................................... 2-20 Washing ........................................................................ 7-2 Waxing .......................................................................... 7-2 Weights (See dimensions and weights)....................... 9-9 Wheel/tire size .............................................................. 9-9 Wheels and tires......................................................... 8-33
10-8
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels........................... 7-4 Window washer fluid .................................................. 8-16 Window(s)
Cleaning ................................................................. 7-3 Power windows .................................................... 2-35 Windshield wiper and washer switch......................... 2-20 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch .................. 2-20 Wiper blades ........................................................ 8-20
X
Xenon headlights ........................................................ 2-21
INDEX
10-9
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91) may be temporarily used, but only under the following precautions:
Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used since this will damage the three way catalyst.
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
For additional information, see "Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
API Certification Mark
API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving
ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures.
See "Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants" in the "9. Technical and consumer information" section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
See Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the inside of the driver side center pillar.
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the "Break-in schedule" in the "5. Starting and driving" section. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.
Engine oil 8-11
Brake fluid 8-15 Meters and gauges 2-3 Driver supplemental air bag 1-7
Hood release 3-11
Trunk lid release 3-12 Fuel filler lid release 3-17
Seat belt 1-22
Door lock 3-3
Supplemental side air bag 1-7 Supplemental curtain sideimpact air bag 1-7
Windshield washer fluid 8-16
Battery 8-16 Engine coolant 8-10 Power steering fluid 8-14 Automatic transmission fluid 8-14 Front passenger supplemental air bag 1-7 Air conditioner 4-13 Audio system 4-18
Supplemental side air bag 1-7 Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag 1-7
Fuel filler lid release 3-17, Fuel recommendation 9-3 Spare tire 6-5, 8-44
SIT0113
Acrobat Distiller Command 3.01 for AIX 4.1.1 and later (RS6000)